JP7392818B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, and includes a game area in which the game balls can move, and the game balls fired by a firing means are guided to the game area.

In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the pachinko machine is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is set in an open state that allows a game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases where a special game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197312

By the way, gaming machines are constantly being required to add new features, such as by incorporating new configurations.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can add new interest .

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
As a result of the lottery, there may be a state in which the first result is awaited and a state in which the second result is awaited,
The second result is a result more advantageous to the player than the first result,
Both the first result and the second result may be in a waiting state,
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, it is taught in a predetermined manner that the first result is awaited, and the first result and the second result are awaited. a first standby teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are on standby in a state where both the first result and the second result are on standby;
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the predetermined aspect does not teach that the first result is awaited, and the first result is In a state where both the second result and the second result are on standby, it is possible to teach that the second result is on standby without teaching in the predetermined manner that the first result is on standby. a second standby teaching means;
An upper limit is set on the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait, and when the upper limit of the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait is reached, no more The first result and the second result are not waited for,
The second waiting teaching means is configured to be able to display characters to teach that the second result is waiting,
comprising means for resolving the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited;
The canceling means is characterized in that it is brought into a stopped state after the operation for canceling the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited is completed .

According to claim 1, new interest can be added .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation time judgment processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry counting process. It is a flow chart showing special prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing non-special winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows early detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the type ball entry process. It is a flowchart which shows accessory jackpot setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a blade member opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows trigger corresponding unit control processing. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing advance production processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a front schematic diagram of a central prize-winning unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view showing the route distribution device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the route distribution device. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the route distribution device in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution device in another embodiment. They are a schematic plan view and a schematic front view of a route distribution device in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution device in another embodiment. They are a schematic plan view and a schematic front view of a route distribution device in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. . As shown in FIG. 6, etc., the outer frame 11 is composed of an upper frame component 11a, a lower frame component 11b, a left frame component 11c, and a right frame component 11d, and is assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole. There is. An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11. Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided. In addition, a production button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the production button 125, a corresponding production is performed on a decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later. The contents of the performance may be changed.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as handle) 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and protrudes toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and a manipulation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the manipulation amount of the operating section of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. The handle 18 is also provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, firing of game balls by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while gripping the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an annular illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Furthermore, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the annular illumination section 102, which are turned on when a predetermined error occurs. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination section 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

In addition, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a firing device 60 and a firing rail for guiding the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60 are provided. 61 is installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the firing device 60, there is a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the firing position of the firing device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b as starting ball entering means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a specific ball entering means, and a special winning device. The display device 43 and the like are arranged in a through hole formed by router machining, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower tray 15. For example, if a ball enters the starting winning device 33a or 33b, three balls enter, if a ball enters the general winning opening 31, five balls enter, and if a ball enters the variable winning device 32, three balls enter. 10 game balls are paid out. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. . Further, the game board 30 has a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, the central winning unit 37 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 4, 39, 40, etc. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 39, the central winning unit 37 is provided at the center of the game area (game board 30), and forms a specific area 401 into which a game ball moving (flowing down) in the game area can enter. A housing 402 is provided. In the upper part of the housing 402, a pair of left and right ball entrance openings 403 are formed on both left and right sides, which serve as entrances through which game balls moving in the game area enter the specific area 401. The central winning unit 37 also includes a pair of left and right blade members 404 that are displaced between a closed position where each ball entry opening 403 is closed and an open position where the ball entry opening 403 is opened, and a blade solenoid that opens and closes the blade members 404. 405 (see block diagram in FIG. 7). When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is brought into a closed state, and the ball cannot enter the specific area 401. On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is brought into the open state, and entry of the ball into the specific area 401 is permitted.

Although the details will be described later, the feather member 404 has a ball that has entered the first starting winning device 33a or second starting winning device 33b, and has been won in a lottery based on the entered ball (such as a small hit). ), it is kept open for a predetermined period of time. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, and when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and one is in the closed position. If the other is in the closed position, the other is also in the closed position.

The specific area 401 of this embodiment includes a route distribution area 406 where game balls entering from the ball entry opening 403 are first guided, a winning lottery area 407 located below this area, and a type lottery area located further below the route distribution area 406. It is divided into a region 408.

In addition, in the win/fail lottery area 407, a distribution means for randomly guiding (distributing) game balls that have entered the win/fail lottery area 407 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the game area on the back side of the game board 30. A rotating body unit 410 is provided as a rotor.

As shown in FIG. 40, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 fixed to the game board 30, and a substantially annular unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411. In addition, a generally circular housing recess 413 is formed corresponding to the approximately central portion of the unit cover 412 . Further, the rotating body unit 410 includes a substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 that is rotatably provided inside the housing recess 413, and a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414 in a fixed direction. In this embodiment, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view at a constant period. Note that the rotating body motor 415 is constituted by a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. Further, as will be described in detail later, although the rotating body 414 rotates at a constant period, it does not rotate at a constant speed.

The rotating body 414 has three pockets 416 along its outer periphery that can each receive one game ball. The three pocket sections 416 are divided into two special pocket sections 416a and the other (one) non-special pocket section 416b. The non-special pocket portion 416b is open toward the outer circumferential side and above of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414. There is. On the other hand, the special pocket part 416a is open on the outer peripheral side, above, and below of the rotating body 414, and there is no bottom wall part 417 like the non-special pocket part 416b. In addition, the peripheral part of the special pocket part 416a is made of a resin material that is colored differently from other parts, so that it is easy to distinguish between the special pocket part 416a and the non-special pocket part 416b. It has become.

On the upper surface side of the unit base 411, a motor installation part 423 in which the rotary body motor 415 is installed and a rotary body installation part 424 in which the rotary body 414 is installed are formed. Furthermore, a link mechanism (not shown) including three gears for transmitting the driving force of the rotary body motor 415 to the rotary body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411.

The unit cover 412 is installed so as to surround the rotating body installation part 424 of the unit base 411, and is connected to a substantially cylindrical cylinder wall part 431 that forms the accommodation recess 413 together with the rotary body installation part 424, and from the upper edge of the cylinder wall part 431. It includes an upper wall portion 432 extending toward the outer circumference, and an enclosing wall 434 extending upward from the upper edge of the cylindrical wall portion 431 (the edge of the opening on the inner circumference of the upper wall portion 432).

Further, the enclosure wall 434 is provided with a gate portion 435 that is opened in a range of about 90 degrees on the front edge side of the accommodation recess 413, thereby communicating the inner circumference side and the outer circumference side of the enclosure wall 434. . Further, on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 432, a substantially annular game ball rolling path 433 in which a game ball can roll is formed. The game ball rolling path 433 slopes downward toward the front and the inner peripheral side of the game ball rolling path 433 with respect to the portion located behind the front edge of the storage recess 413, and Regarding the part located in front of the part, it is inclined downward toward the rear and the inner circumferential side of the game ball rolling path 433 (the central part side in the left-right direction). Therefore, when the game ball falls into the game ball rolling path 433, it is prevented from falling into the storage recess 413 (rotating body 414) from the rear or left and right sides of the storage recess 413. is configured to roll and enter the pocket portion 416 of the rotary body 414 via the gate portion 435 at the front of the rotary body 414 .

Note that the unit base 411 is also tilted forward in accordance with the tilt of the unit cover 412, and accordingly, the rotating body 414 is also tilted forward, that is, the axis of rotation of the rotating body 414 is directed upward. The player is placed in such a way that it is tilted slightly forward (an attitude that makes it easier for players in front of him to see).

The unit base 411 also has a safe passage 427 that communicates with the type lottery area 408 and an out passage 428 that communicates with the outside of the specific area 401 (in this embodiment, the back side of the game board 30 that is outside the gaming area). It is formed. The entrances of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428 are formed by gouging the rotating body installation part 424 at a position above which the rotating body 414 can pass (on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall part 431).

Then, as the game ball enters the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435, the position of the special pocket section 416a and the entrance of the safe passage 427 coincides with the rotation of the rotating body 414. In this case, the ball falls downward from the special pocket portion 416a and enters the safe passage 427.

In addition, when a game ball enters the non-special pocket part 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate part 435, the position of the non-special pocket part 416b and the entrance of the safe passage 427 changes as the rotating body 414 rotates. Even if they match, the bottom wall part 417 provided in the non-special pocket part 416b prevents the game ball accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b from falling (entering) into the safe passage 427 (a gap is formed in which the ball can fall). (not).

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed wider than the safe passage 427 (toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414), and the lower part of the cylindrical wall part 431 is omitted above the out passage 428. . Therefore, when the rotating body 414 rotates further and the positions of the non-special pocket section 416b in which the game ball is accommodated and the out passage 428 match, the gaming ball that was accommodated in the non-special pocket section 416b is moved to the out passage. The ball will be pitched at 428.

Further, the safe passage 427 is provided with a special ball entry detection switch 461 as special ball entry detection means for detecting passing game balls. Then, when a game ball enters the safe passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or the variable winning device 32 is opened. The winning of eight game balls constitutes one round, and the player is granted the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) in which this is repeated a predetermined number of times. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when detection is performed by the special ball entry detection switch 461, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the type of jackpot state is determined in the type lottery area 408. If determined, the jackpot condition is configured to be initiated.

In addition, in the out passage 428 from which the game ball is discharged outside the gaming area when the game ball enters, there is a non-special entry detection switch 462 as non-special entry detection means for detecting the passing game ball. is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special ball entry detection switch 461 or the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 is detected, ten game balls are placed on the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15). paid out.

Note that the number of game balls that are paid out when the special ball entry detection switch 461 and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 are detected is not particularly limited, and may be one or zero, for example. But that's fine. In this embodiment, the safe passage 427 in which the special ball entry detection switch 461 is arranged corresponds to the special entry means (second ball entry means), and the out passage 428 in which the non-special entry detection switch 462 is arranged. corresponds to a non-special ball entry means (first ball entry means).

Furthermore, an overhang portion 440 extending from the upper edge of the surrounding wall 434 toward the inner circumferential side of the surrounding wall 434 is provided at a portion of the surrounding wall 434 corresponding to the upper part of the entrances of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428. It is being The overhanging portion 440 is configured to cover from above approximately half of the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 of each pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a, non-special pocket portion 416b) located below the overhanging portion 440. . Therefore, another game ball is placed on top of the game ball that entered the predetermined pocket part 416, and the two game balls that are stacked vertically continue to the safe passage 427 or the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball enters the ball or jumps over the enclosure wall 434 for some reason and directly enters the pocket part 416 located at the position matching the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428.

However, in this embodiment, since two of the three pocket parts 416 are special pocket parts 416a, the two special pocket parts 416a of the rotating body 414 match the gate part 435 twice in a row. When the game balls enter the two special pocket parts 416a at the same timing, the game balls enter the safe passage 427 one after another (continuously).

In this embodiment, the entrance of the safe passage 427 is located at the lower right position when the rotating body installation part 424 is viewed from above, and the entire formation range of the entrance of the safe passage 427 is within the formation range of the gate part 435. The entrance of the out passage 428 is provided at the upper right position when the rotating body installation part 424 is viewed from above.

Now, as shown in FIG. 39 etc., the central winning unit 37 has a normal passage 701 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 (route distribution area 406) to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433, It is provided with a special passage 702 that guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the midstream part of the game ball rolling path 433. The special passages 702 of this embodiment are provided as a pair of left and right passages. Further, in the route distribution area 406, a route distribution device 703 as a route distribution means provided at a position where game balls entering from the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 fall, and a route distribution device 703 provided below the route distribution device 703. A normal guide part 704 that guides the game ball to the normal passage 701 and a special guide part 705 that is formed on both left and right sides of the route distribution device 703 and guide the game ball to the special passage 702 are provided. . In addition, a switch for detecting game balls is provided for the special passage 702, and when the switch is detected, an effect (sound effect, liquid crystal display) to notify that a game ball is passing through the special passage 702 is provided. etc.).

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 42, the route sorting device 703 has a shaft hole 712 into which a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction can be inserted, and is rotatably supported with respect to the shaft pin 711. It includes a substantially cylindrical shaft portion 713, a first wing portion 714 protruding leftward from the shaft portion 713, and a second wing portion 715 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 713. The route sorting device 703 of this embodiment is made of semi-transparent resin.

Further, the route distribution device 703 has a symmetrical shape with the shaft portion 713 as the center, and is stable in a reference posture in which the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 protrude from the shaft portion 713 to both left and right sides. It is configured to be stationary (supposed to be in an equilibrium state). Furthermore, guide surfaces 714a and 715a that constitute the upper surfaces of the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the standard attitude are inclined downward toward both sides and communicate with the special guide section 705. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 42, the shaft pin 711 has a rear end supported by the rear wall of the housing 402 that defines the rear part of the route distribution area 406, and a transparent front part that defines the front part of the route distribution means 406. The front end portion is supported by the panel 717 (bearing hole 717a formed in the panel 717). Further, although not shown, on the rear wall of the housing 402, first wings are provided at the rear position of the first wing part 714 and the rear position of the second wing part 715 of the route distribution means 406 in the standard attitude. The ball entry lamp and the second ball entry lamp are provided so as not to come into contact with the route distribution means 406. In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution device 703 is in the standard posture corresponds to the second guidance state, and the state in which the route distribution device 703 is in a changed posture tilted from the standard posture (the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 are The state in which the guide member is in the position extending to ) corresponds to the first guiding state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39, the central winning unit 37 has a pair of left and right introduction passages 718 that guide game balls that enter from the left and right pair of ball entrance openings 403 to the back side of the route distribution area 406. It is provided. More specifically, the introduction passage 718 directs game balls that have entered the specific area 401 through the first ball entry opening 403a on the left side of the ball entry opening 403 to a position above the first wing portion 714. A game in which a ball enters the specific area 401 through the first introduction passage 718a for guiding (falling onto the guide surface 714a of the first wing section 714) and the second ball entry opening 403b on the right side of the ball entry opening 403. A second introduction passage 718b is provided for guiding the ball to a position above the second wing section 715 (for causing the ball to fall onto the guide surface 715a of the second wing section 715). In addition, the distance of the first introduction passage 718a and the distance of the second introduction passage 718b are the same, and the game ball enters the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b (entrances thereof) at almost the same time. The balls are discharged from (the exits of) the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b almost simultaneously.

Further, in the middle of each introduction passage 718 (the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b), an entry ball count switch 437 (hereinafter referred to as the first introduction passage 718a) as an entry detection means for detecting passage of a game ball is provided. The switch installed in the second introduction passage 718b is also referred to as the "first ball count switch 437a," and the switch installed in the second introduction passage 718b is also referred to as the "second ball count switch 437b." In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the first ball entry opening 403a always passes through the first introduction passage 718a, and a game ball that enters the second ball entry opening 403b always passes through the second introduction passage 718b. The game ball is configured to pass through, and a game ball that enters the specific area 401 is always detected by the ball entry count switch 437 on either the left or right side.

The passage width of each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b exceeds the diameter of the game ball and is less than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, about 1.4 times the diameter of the game ball). ing. Further, the exits of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are formed at symmetrical positions with respect to the shaft portion 713 of the route distribution device 703. Furthermore, the first incoming ball count switch 437a and the second incoming ball count switch 437b of this embodiment are located near the respective exits of the corresponding first introduction passage 718a and second introduction passage 718b (in this example, the game balls are placed near the exit). (a portion that moves forward toward the front), the position is the same distance away from each exit (for example, 1 cm behind each exit).

When the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the game ball that enters the specific area 401 via the first ball entry opening 403a or the second ball entry opening 403b is transferred to the first introduction passage 718a or the second ball entry opening 403b. It passes through the second introduction passage 718b and falls onto the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41(b) and 41(c), if the game ball falls only on either the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715, the route distribution device 703 It will rotate (tilt) due to the force received from the game ball. Further, as the route distribution device 703 rotates, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715 communicate with the normal guide section 704 (the first wing section 714 and the second wing section The communication path to the normal guide section 704 that was blocked by the guide section 715 is opened), and the game ball is guided (enters) into the normal guide section 704.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(a), when the game balls (the same number, for example, one at a time) fall onto the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 at almost the same time, In this case, the rotation of the route distribution device 703 is suppressed. By avoiding rotation of the route distribution device 703, both game balls that have fallen onto the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 are guided to the special guide section 705, respectively.

In addition, the normal guide part 704, the normal passage 701, and the game ball rolling path 433 constitute the first guide route (normal route), and the special guide part 705, the special passage 702, and the game ball rolling path 433 ( (a portion downstream of the midstream portion) constitutes a second guide route (special route). A route distribution device 703 is provided at a branch point between the normal route (normal passage 701) and the special route (special passage 702).

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the rotating body unit 410 is provided with a slide unit 721 that is installed corresponding to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433 and is configured to be slidable in the left and right direction. . The slide unit 721 is a slide that includes a passing side guide plate 723 that slopes downward toward the left, and an out side guide plate 724 that is connected to the right side of the passing side guide plate 723 and slopes downwardly toward the right. It includes a member 722 and a slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722 left and right. Note that the slide motor 725 is constituted by a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main controller 261.

Furthermore, the exit of the normal passage 701 is formed above the slide unit 721 (slide member 722), and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 701 is placed on the passage side guide plate 723 of the slide member 722 or on the out side. It will fall onto the guide plate 724. In addition, the width of the outside guide plate 724 is configured to be wider than the width of the passage side guide plate 723 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the passing side guide plate 723 and the out side guide plate 724 (the top of the slide member 722) is located to the right of the widthwise center position of the exit of the normal passage 701. The slide speed when the camera is positioned on the left side is set to be faster than the slide speed when the camera is positioned on the left side. With this configuration, during the reciprocating movement of the slide member 722, the time when the top of the slide member 722 is located on the left side of the widthwise center position of the exit of the normal passage 701 is longer than the time when the top part of the slide member 722 is located on the right side. It is configured to be. Thereby, for example, the game balls that have passed through the normal passage 701 are distributed to the right side in a ratio of 1:5 by the slide unit 721.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, on the upper wall portion 432 (gaming ball rolling path 433) of the unit cover 412 of the rotating body unit 410, at the right position of the surrounding wall 434 (rotating body 414), A dropout opening 727 is formed that communicates with the out passage 428 . In other words, the game ball guided to the right side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 falls into the out passage 428 through the falling opening 727 and is discharged to the outside of the game area. There is. The falling opening 727 is in communication with a part of the out passage 428 upstream of the installation position of the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, and the game that has fallen into the out passage 428 through the falling opening 727 A ball will also be detected by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the left side of the game ball rolling path 433 by the slide unit 721 is displaced toward the front in a counterclockwise direction on the game ball rolling path 433, and is moved left and right multiple times in front of the gate section 435. Then, when the relative position of the rotating body 414 with the special pocket part 416a or the non-special pocket part 416b matches, it enters the pocket parts 416a and 416b via the gate part 435. It happens.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the exits of the pair of left and right special passages 702 are formed at the left and right side positions of the rotating body unit 410 (upper wall portion 432 of the unit cover 412), respectively. The game ball that has passed will enter the midstream part of the game ball rolling path 433. Even if the game ball passes through the special passage 702 on the right side, the game ball is guided to a part of the game ball rolling path 433 on the downstream side of the dropout opening 727, so that the game ball passes through the special passage 702. Regarding the game ball, it will necessarily enter the special pocket part 416a or the non-special pocket part 416b of the rotating body 414 via the gate part 435. That is, if the game ball can enter the special guide section 705 and pass through the special passage 702, it is possible to avoid (skip) the sorting by the slide unit 721, and as a result, the game ball can enter the special pocket section 416a. It is possible to increase the possibility of hitting a ball and, by extension, the expectation of occurrence of a jackpot state.

Note that in this embodiment, the rotating body 414 and the slide member 722 are configured to continue operating at a constant cycle or a constant rhythm while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. For example, the operation is started when a game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437, and when all the game balls are ejected from the specific area 401 (a specified time has elapsed since all the game balls were ejected). The configuration may be such that the operation stops if the

Further, in this embodiment, a game ball that enters the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the safe passage 427 and is detected by the special entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408. It is configured as follows. The type lottery area 408 includes a 15R ball entrance 731 that gives a jackpot condition of "15 rounds" (15 rounds jackpot) when a game ball enters the ball, and a "7 round" jackpot when a game ball enters the ball. 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is given, and 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is given when a game ball enters the ball. It is provided. Furthermore, a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that has entered the 15R ball entry port 731, a 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered the 7R ball entry port 732, and a 3R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered the 7R ball entry port 732. A 3R ball entry detection switch 736 for detecting a game ball entering the ball 733 is provided.

The type lottery area 408 also includes a type sorting means for sorting game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. A sorting device 741 is provided. The type sorting device 741 includes a start stand 742 where game balls entering the type lottery area 408 are first guided, and a 3R where game balls that have passed through the start stand 742 are guided and which lead to a 3R ball entrance 733. A first passing board 744 that sorts the game balls into either the guiding path 743 or "others" and the first passing board 744 guides the game balls that have been sorted into "others" and directs the game balls to the 7R entry ball. It is provided with a second spanning plate 747 that distributes the ball to either a 7R guide passage 745 leading to the opening 732 or a 15R guide passage 746 leading to the 15R ball entrance 731.

More specifically, a starting platform 742 whose top surface slopes downwardly toward the right is installed at the upper left of the type lottery area 408, and a first spanning board 744 is installed to the right of and slightly below the starting platform 742. A second spanning board 747 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first spanning board 744, and a 15R guide passage 746 and a 15R ball entrance 731 are installed to the right and slightly below the second spanning board 747. ing. The first spanning plate 744 and the second spanning plate 747 include a shaft portion 748 that is rotatably supported so that its central axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a substantially plate-shaped receiver that protrudes to the right from the shaft portion 748. 749. Furthermore, a first cam 750 and a second cam 751 that contact (support) the lower surfaces of the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 747 are provided below the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 747, respectively. The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are rotated by a motor (not shown), so that the first spanning plate 744 and the second spanning plate 747 are rotated (tilted).

The first spanning board 744 of this embodiment has an advanced position where the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is slightly inclined downwardly toward the right and communicates with the upper surface side of the second spanning board 747, and a lower side than the case where the upper surface of the receiving part 749 is in the advanced position. The upper surface of the receiving part 749 is configured to be tilted significantly downward, so that it can be displaced between a drop position communicating with the 3R guide passage 743. Furthermore, the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 of the second spanning plate 747 is slightly inclined downwardly toward the right, and the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is lower than that in the advanced position where the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is in communication with the 15R guide passage 746 than in the advanced position. It is configured to be tilted significantly downward and to be movable between a drop position communicating with the 7R guide passage 745.

Note that the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 have the same shape and size, and rotate, for example, counterclockwise in FIG. 39. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation periods of the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are not synchronized, and for example, the first cam 750 rotates slightly faster than the second cam 751. In addition, the game ball guided to the 3R guidance path 743 is confirmed to enter the 3R ball entrance 733, and the game ball guided to the 7R guidance path 745 is determined to enter the 7R ball entrance 732. However, the game ball guided to the 15R guiding passage 746 is configured to enter the 15R ball entry opening 731.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first passing board 744 via the starting platform 742 moves to the right side of the first passing board 744, the first passing board 744 is at the advance position (range). If there is, the game ball is guided to the second passing board 747. Furthermore, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 747 moves to the right side of the second spanning board 747, if the second spanning board 747 is at the advance position (range), the game ball will move to 15R. It is guided to a guide passage 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 747 moves to the right side of the second spanning board 747, if the second spanning board 747 is at the falling position (range), the game ball will move to 7R. It is guided to a guide passage 745. Furthermore, when the game ball guided by the first spanning board 744 moves to the right side of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the falling position (range), the game ball will move to 3R. It is guided to a guide passage 743. In this embodiment, after the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, any one of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is detected. In this case, a jackpot state of the corresponding type is started.

Note that the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 747 are configured such that the front and rear widths thereof are wider than the left and right widths (widths in the centrifugal direction). Furthermore, the starting platform 742, the first spanning board 744, and the second spanning board 747 are configured not only to be inclined downward to the right as described above, but also to be inclined slightly forward and downward. In other words, the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 through the safe passage 427 is guided to the starting stand 742 from the back side of the starting stand 742, and is guided to the starting stand 742, the first passing board 744, and the second passing board 747. It is configured to move forward to the right hand side. In addition, the entrance portions of the 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, and 15R guide path 746 cover the range where the game ball is guided by the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 747, In addition, it has a shape (approximately funnel-shaped) that collects the received game balls into a passage with a width that allows each game ball to pass through. Further, the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are disposed corresponding to the rear portions of the lower surfaces of the first spanning plate 744 and the second spanning plate 747 (receiving portion 749), and are arranged in the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage. It is configured so as not to interfere with 745.

In this embodiment, the distance of the 3R guide passage 743 is longer than the distance of the 7R guide passage 745, and the distance of the 7R guide passage 745 is longer than the distance of the 15R guide passage 746. Furthermore, due to the difference in distance between each guide path 743, 745, and 746, the average time required for a game ball entering the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 (3R arrival time) The average time required for a game ball entering the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 (7R arrival time) is shorter than the 7R arrival time. The average time required for the game ball entering the area 408 to be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 (15R arrival time) is shorter. For example, the 3R arrival time is set to "9 seconds to 10 seconds", the 7R arrival time is set to "6 seconds to 7 seconds", and the 15R arrival time is set to "3 seconds to 4 seconds".

Further, the rotating body 414 is designed to require "9 seconds" to complete one revolution. However, the speed of the rotating body 414 is not constant. That is, among the two special pocket parts 416a provided side by side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 414, the upstream special pocket part 416a that reaches the gate part 435 first matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (front position The time it takes for the special pocket part 416a on the downstream side that later reaches the gate part 435 to match the entrance of the safe passage 427 (to be in the front position) is "1.5 seconds". , it rotates faster than in other states. Note that the rotation speed of the rotor 414 can be adjusted by changing the distance between the special pocket parts 416a in the rotation direction of the rotor 414 (for example, the rotation speed of the rotor 414 can be kept constant). is possible.

Then, at the timing when the two special pocket parts 416a successively match the gate part 435 provided in front of the rotating body 414 (without sandwiching the non-special pocket part 416b), a plurality of game balls are placed in the gate part 435. When the ball is waiting (stayed) in the peripheral area for the ball to enter the pocket section 416, the game ball enters the two special pocket sections 416a in succession, and as a result, the type lottery area 408 Two game balls will enter the target in succession. In this case, the time lag from when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until the next game ball enters the type lottery area 408 is the shortest, and the time is "1.5 seconds".

With this configuration, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guidance path 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 7R guidance path 745, Or, if the situation arises in which the game ball is guided to the 15R guiding path 746, the subsequent game ball enters the 3R ball entrance 733 (detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736). The ball enters the 7R ball entry port 732 or the 15R ball entry port 731 (detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 or the 15R ball entry detection switch 734). Also, for example, if two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is guided to the 7R guidance path 745, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guidance path 746. In this case, the following game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 before the preceding game ball enters the 7R ball entrance 732 (detected by the 7R ball entrance detection switch 735). It is designed to be a ball (detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734).

Of the two special pocket parts 416a provided side by side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 414, after the downstream special pocket part 416a matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (after being in the front position), the upstream special pocket part 416a The time it takes for the side special pocket part 416a to match the entrance of the safe passage 427 (to be in the front position) is "7.5 seconds". Therefore, after the game ball that entered the special pocket section 416a on the downstream side enters the type lottery area 408, even if the game ball that entered the special pocket section 416a on the upstream side enters the type lottery area 408, There is a time lag of "7.5 seconds", and even if the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 first was guided to the 3R guidance passage 743, the game ball that entered later was guided to the 15R ball entrance 731. Even so, the following game ball will not be detected by the 15R ball entering detection switch 734 before the previous game ball is detected by the 3R ball entering detection switch 736 (in other words, if the type lottery area 408 is Since the difference between the preceding game ball and the following game ball is 7.5 seconds, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guidance path 743 and the following game ball is guided to the 15R guidance path 746. , the preceding game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 with 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds remaining, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 for 3 to 4 seconds. Therefore, the detection of the subsequent game ball cannot overtake the detection of the preceding game ball.

In this embodiment, the "15 round jackpot" corresponds to the "7 round jackpot" and the second special gaming state (second benefit, second advantageous state, second grant) for the "7 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" corresponds to the first special gaming state (first benefit, first advantageous state, first grant) for "15 round jackpot" and is the second special gaming state for "3 round jackpot" (second benefit, second advantageous state, second grant), and "3 round jackpot" corresponds to the first special gaming state (first privilege, first advantageous state, first grant). Further, the 15R ball entrance 731 is configured as a second type ball entrance means for the 7R ball entrance 732 and the 3R ball entrance 733, and the 7R ball entrance 732 is configured as a first type ball entrance means for the 15R ball entrance 731. and is configured as a second type ball entrance means for the 3R ball entrance 733, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is configured as a first type ball entrance means for the 15R ball entrance 731 and the 7R ball entrance 732. Ru. Further, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is configured as a second type ball entry detection means for the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is configured for the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. The 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is configured as a first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means for the 3R ball entry detection switch 736. It is configured as a first type ball entry detection means for the switch 735.

Furthermore, the 15R arrival time corresponds to the second type determination time for the 7R arrival time and the 3R arrival time, and the 7R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time, and the second type determination time for the 3R arrival time. This corresponds to the type determination time, and the 3R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time with respect to the 15R arrival time and the 7R arrival time. In addition, the 15R guidance passage 746 is configured as a second guidance passage (second ball entry route) for the 7R guidance passage 745 and the 3R guidance passage 743, and the 7R guidance passage 745 is configured as a first guidance passage (second ball entry route) for the 15R guidance passage 746. The 3R guidance passage 743 is configured as a (first ball entry route) for the 15R guidance passage 746 and the 7R guidance passage 745. 1 ball entry route).

In addition, in the type lottery area 408, a 3R early detection switch 753 is provided near the entrance of the 3R guidance path 743 and detects a game ball moving in the 3R guidance path 743, and a 3R early detection switch 753 is provided near the entrance of the 7R guidance path 745. A 7R early detection switch 754 is provided to detect game balls moving in the 7R guide path 745. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the center winning unit 37 is provided with a translucent cover 756 (portion marked with a dotted pattern in FIG. 4) that covers the front of the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745. The visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is slightly reduced.

Furthermore, a translucent 3R sticker 757a labeled "3R" is affixed to the covering cover 756 at a portion covering the entrance of the 3R guidance passage 743, and a semitransparent 3R sticker 757a labeled "7R" is affixed to the portion covering the entrance of the 7R guidance passage 745. A semi-transparent 7R sticker 757b marked with "15R" is pasted thereon, and a semi-transparent 15R sticker 757c marked with "15R" is pasted in a region covering the 15R ball entrance 731. Although details will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the corresponding sound effect is derived. Basically, if a game ball enters the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c, which are likened to winning openings (if the game ball enters the back side), the jackpot state of the corresponding type will occur. It can be recognized as a given. In this embodiment, the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 constitute early detection means. Further, the 3R seal 757a, the 7R seal 757b, and the 15R seal 757c constitute an entrance display section.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting winning device 33a is provided at the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37 when looking at the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the second starting winning device 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37. Further, the second starting winning device 33b includes a pair of opening/closing members 33c provided on both sides to open and close. In this embodiment, a protrusion is provided directly above the second starting winning device 33b, and when the opening/closing member 33c is closed, it is virtually impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. It becomes.

Although the details will be described later, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b include a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224a and 224a, respectively, which serve as starting ball detection means for detecting entered game balls. A switch 224b is provided. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a "small win" in which the blade member 404 is released to open the specific area 401, or a jackpot in which the variable winning device 32 is opened. A lottery is held to determine whether or not you have won the "jackpot" that generates the state. Further, when a winning lottery is conducted based on the detection by the first starting winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b, a variable display is displayed on the special display device 43 to show the result of the winning lottery. It is configured to be carried out. In addition, the "wins" in the winning/failure lottery include "small wins" and "big wins", and based on the detection of the starting prize switches 224a and 224b, it is determined whether it is one of these "wins" or the feather member 404. A lottery is held to determine whether the winner is a "loser" in which neither variable winning device 32 nor the variable winning device 32 is released.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common winning lottery is performed when the detection is performed by the first starting prize switch 224a and when the detection is performed by the second starting winning switch 224b, and in both cases, the special display A first special display device, which is configured to display a variable display in the device 43, displays a variable display for teaching the result of the winning/losing lottery to be performed based on the detection by the first starting winning switch 224a; It is also possible to provide a second special display device that displays a variable display for teaching the result of the winning/failure lottery conducted based on the detection by the second starting winning switch 224b. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display is separately held and stored, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is given priority over the other. It may be configured so that In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratios of the types of jackpot states that are awarded when winning in the lottery may be different or may be the same.

The through gates 34 are arranged on both left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can pass through them one by one. Further, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c). If the player wins in the ball entering assist lottery, the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a specified time.

A special display device 43 and a normal symbol display device 41 are provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. The special display device 43 of this embodiment is composed of eight lamps, and the normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two lamps. Note that the configuration of the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 is not particularly limited; for example, they may be configured with more lamp groups, a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, a liquid crystal display, etc. It may be configured by a display device such as a device.

In addition, regarding the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, a switching display (fluctuating display) for teaching the lottery results of the win/fail lottery is started, and for a predetermined period of time. After that, when the variable display is stopped, an aspect corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed. Further, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the results of the winning lottery are displayed definitively.

In addition, if you win a "big hit" in the lottery, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds or 8 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 as one round, and this is 15 A jackpot that is repeated twice (hereinafter referred to as a "direct jackpot") is awarded. In this embodiment, in addition to winning a "big hit" in the lottery based on the ball entering the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, as described above, the special pocket in the specific area 401 A jackpot state also occurs when a game ball enters the portion 416a (the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461).

In addition, regarding the normal symbol display device 41, when a game ball passes through the through gate 34, a switching display (fluctuating display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery starts, and after a predetermined time, the fluctuating display changes. When stopping the game, an aspect corresponding to the result of the input assist lottery is displayed. Further, the display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the ball entry assist lottery is displayed definitively.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that the variable display is held is displayed on a normal symbol provided on the side of the normal symbol display device 41. The fluctuation hold lamp 44 is turned on and displayed. The normal variable hold lamp 44 of this embodiment is composed of two lamps, and the number of holds is taught by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states of each lamp.

In addition, the upper part of the central winning unit 37 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and in conjunction with the variable display of the special display device 43, a decorative pattern in which a number pattern is attached to a predetermined pattern is attached for presentation. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner. The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the special display device 43, Display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display on the special display device 43, the variable display for that amount will be displayed after the variable display being performed at that point ends. The configuration is as follows. In other words, the variable display on the special display device 43 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this suspended fluctuation display is determined is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the maximum number of times the fluctuation display is suspended is up to four times in response to the game balls that enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. Display is suspended.

Further, the number of hold times of the variable display on the special display device 43 is displayed by lighting on a special change hold lamp 46 provided on the side of the special display device 43. The special variable hold lamp 46 is composed of two lamps, and the number of holds is taught by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states of each lamp. In addition, even if a new game ball enters the starting winning device 33 during a jackpot or a small win (while the feather member 404 is open), the variable display for that amount will also be suspended, and the variable display will not be displayed as a jackpot. Executed after the state or small win state ends. Incidentally, the decorative symbol display device 42 may also display a pending icon for teaching the number of pending times of the variable display of the special display device 43.

The variable winning device 32 (big winning hole) is arranged at the lower center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). Further, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a jackpot occurs, it is in an open state in which game balls can win.

Furthermore, a rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. It will be destroyed.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. It is discharged.

Further, the reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like to substantially close the exit of the dispensing passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication path 71 on the entrance side. In addition, the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame set 14 is in the closed state, the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflowing to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), It passes through the passage 71 and is delivered to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to. In this embodiment, control is performed such as prohibiting the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. Incidentally, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, a frame cover 213 made of resin is provided on the back side of the game board 30 to protrude rearward and cover the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 are removably attached, facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a that has an opening for exposing the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 , and is placed on the back side of the frame cover 213 . Fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a, 262a are made of transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won in various winning holes. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 includes ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that correspond to various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31 as ball entering means and detect game balls that have entered the various winning holes. is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning hole switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning hole 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Further, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are respectively provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b as starting ball entry detection means. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as the main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, starting winning switches 224a, 224b detecting balls entering the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, entering ball counting switches 437 (first entering ball counting switch 437a, second entering ball counting switch 437) provided in the central winning unit 37. count switch 437b), special ball entry detection switch 461, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736), and The early detection switches 753 and 754 are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Excluding cases detected by the through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and early detection switches 753, 754.)
In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a grand prize opening solenoid that opens the grand prize opening with the variable winning device 32, and a pair of opening/closing members 33c with the starting winning device 33. A solenoid for the starting port is provided to drive the opening and closing. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second panel relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability state, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a ball entering error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, and a dispensing error, which is output from the dispensing control device 311. A terminal is provided for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It happens.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked state. It is being

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 610 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 610 and rotating it in one direction, the lock can be opened. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) as special game state control means and opening/closing control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display device 43 and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted, but the input/output port 505 includes a winning opening switch 221, a counting switch 223, starting winning switches 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an entering ball counting switch 437, a special Various detection switches such as the ball entry detection switch 461, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, early detection switches 753, 754, various boards, and blade solenoids that open and close the blade member 404. 405, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a slide motor 725 that causes the slide member 722 to reciprocate, and a tilting operation of the first spanning plate 744 and the second spanning plate 747 (the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 Various electrical parts such as a motor (which rotates the motor) are connected to it. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, various illumination parts, and lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not there is a jackpot is displayed on the special display device 43 controlled by the main controller 261, and the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 Then, a display matching that of the special display device 43 is performed.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing) is activated. (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative pattern display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the first and second start winning switches 224a and 224b, a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 or opens a specific area 401 (wing member 404) The winning random number counter C1 is used for the lottery to decide whether or not to generate a small win, and the variable time random number generating means is used to determine the time of variable display (variable time) performed on the special display device 43. Based on the detection of the time selection counter C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the through gate switch 225, whether or not to open the opening/closing member 33c of the starting winning device 33b. The normal symbol random number counter C3 used for the ball entry assist lottery is used.

The counters C1, C2, CINI, and C3 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 is provided with a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored. It is being Both the special fluctuation holding area and the normal fluctuation holding area include one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, in each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, etc. Stored sequentially. By employing this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to a total of four times as described above. Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By employing this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 399), the winning random number counter C1 is changed to 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the winning random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first or second starting winning device 33a, 33b (detected by the first and second starting winning switch 224a, 224b), the winning random number stored in the winning random number counter buffer The value of counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation reservation area.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery conducted based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the special fluctuation holding area, a "small win", "big win", or "miss" is selected. The number of random number values that result in a "jackpot" is one, and that value is "0." In other words, the probability of winning a "jackpot" is 1/400, the mode corresponding to the "jackpot" (combination of lit lamps) is stopped and displayed on the special display device 43, and a 15-round jackpot state occurs. Become.

Further, the number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 398, and the value is "2 to 399". In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the specific area 401 (blade member 404) is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. There is a "hit". Therefore, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to a "short small win". In addition, if you win a "short small win", the mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "short small win" is stopped and displayed on the special display device 43, and if you win a "long small win", the special display device 43 At step 43, the mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "long small win" is stopped and displayed, and the blade member 404 is opened for a specified time.

Incidentally, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "losing", and in the case of "losing", the special display device 43 displays the mode corresponding to "losing" (the lighting lamp). combination) will be stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win."

In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, a gaming state is set in which the time (variable time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the variable time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as a "time reduction mode", and the gaming state in which a variable display of a normal length is performed will be referred to as a "normal mode". In addition, in the time saving mode, if the variable display on the reserved special display device 43 successively wins a small win (the blade member 404 is closed once, the variable display is performed, and then opened) is the same, but the variation time is short), so the blade member 404 is opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). For this reason, it is easy to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 at once.

Furthermore, in the time reduction mode, the opening/closing member 33c of the second starting prize winning device 33b is in a "high ball entry state" in which it is opened relatively frequently, and the opening/closing member 33c is in a "low ball entry state" in which it is hardly opened. Compared to the mode, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. Specifically, in the normal mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entering assist lottery, which is performed based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34, is 10 seconds, and the ball entering The opening time of the opening/closing member 33c when winning in the assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 33c when winning in the entry assist lottery is 2 seconds.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the variable time selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of the RAM 503. .

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 when a "small win" is achieved in the win/fail lottery is 2 seconds or 3 seconds. Note that the ROM 502 stores first and second variable time selection tables that are referred to when determining whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2 seconds variation" or "3 seconds variation". It is provided. In addition, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "big hit" or "miss" in the lottery is "7 seconds". Furthermore, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is uniformly "0.1 second" regardless of the result of the winning/failure lottery.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are both different prime numbers, and that they are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The random number counter C3 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34.Usually, There are eight random number values that can be won, and the range is "1 to 8".When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired, the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time. After the winning or losing, the symbol (“0” or “-” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) remains open for a predetermined period of time. .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information). Incidentally, when the game balls are paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Furthermore, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, variable time selection counter C2, and normal symbol random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum values (399, 9, 9, respectively in this embodiment). Clear to 0 when each is reached. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step S304, a starting prize winning process is executed in response to a winning to the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in accordance with the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34. do. Furthermore, in step S306, the center winning unit 37 performs a ball entering count process as the ball enters the specific area 401, and in step S307, the special ball entering detection switch 461 detects the ball (safety via the special pocket part 416a). In step S308, a special winning process is executed when the ball enters the out passage 427 (the ball enters the out passage 427 through the non-special pocket part 416b), and in step S308, the non-special winning process is executed when the ball enters the out passage 428 through the non-special pocket portion 416b. Execute special prize winning processing.

In the subsequent step S309, early detection processing is executed in accordance with the detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and in step S310, the detection by the round ball entrance detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entry port 732, and 3R ball entry port 733). After step S310, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13. In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the winning random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area that stores the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a suspended fluctuation. A first starting winning flag is provided for determining whether or not the display is based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a. In addition, in this embodiment, the special fluctuation holding area (separately from the area for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2) is used for the winning lottery based on the balls entering the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b. A jackpot flag indicating that you won a "jackpot," a losing flag indicating that you lost, a long small win flag indicating that you won a "long small win," a flag indicating that you won a "short small win." A short small hit occurrence flag is provided. Further, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag indicating the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the entry of game balls into the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning device 33a based on the detection information of the first starting winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process moves to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process advances to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas in the special variable holding area. In step S505, the first starting winning flag of the holding area in which the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on.

In the subsequent step S506, a validity determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a "small win" or a "big win". Note that details of the validity determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variation time determination process is performed to determine the variation time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Note that details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S508, the first command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) is determined whether the ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. It includes information indicating whether the variation information is based on the first variation display (first variation display or second variation display), information indicating a "small hit" or "big win", and information indicating the variation time, and includes information indicating whether the variation information is based on the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating a "small win" or "big win", and information indicating the variation time. (see) is output to the sub-control device 262.

Here, details of the validity determination process in step S506 will be explained with reference to FIG. 14. In this embodiment, the type of small win (long small win, short small win) is also determined in the success/failure determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area matches "0", which is a value corresponding to a "jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot condition will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area is determined to be equal to "1", which is the value corresponding to "lost". Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is "missing", the missing flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is a "small win", in step S5105, the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed to "long small win". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "win". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit occurrence flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that it is a "short small win", the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is ended.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether the mode is a time reduction mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, a 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to ON. , this process ends. In other words, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the corresponding variation display is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a long small win, a short small win, or a loss.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not a long small hit occurrence flag was set in the right/fail determination process that was performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win," in step S5204, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to "0. , 1''.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "3 to 9", in step S5205, the variable time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43 After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if a "short small hit" occurs, then in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to "0, 1". Determine whether it matches either of the two.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5208 is negative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, the possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected is higher when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, in the case of a jackpot or a loss, in step S5209, a 7 second variation indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the flag, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the process in step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, the second startup determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second startup winning device 33b. This is determined based on the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the hold counter Na is incremented by 1 in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special fluctuation reservation area. In step S512, a validity determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S512 is the same as the validity determination process in step S506 above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S513, a fluctuation time determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a first command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process advances to step S603, and the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the ball entry counting process in step S306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the first ball entry count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a is detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not the second ball entry count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b is detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7202, a first ball entry command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the ball has entered the first ball entry opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side. Set.

After step S7203, in step S7204, the value of the ball entry counter as a first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is incremented by 1. In the following step S7205, a monitoring timer setting process that is taken into account in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer every time the ball entering count switch 437 is detected. Furthermore, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. Note that the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing to be described later) performed every 4mec. After step S7205, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, that is, if both the first ball entry count switch 437a and the second ball entry count switch 437b are detected, the sub-control device 262 is A both ball entry command that indicates that a ball has entered both the first ball entry opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side and the second ball entry opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. Set.

As described above, the first incoming ball count switch 437a and the second incoming ball count switch 437b are located near the exits of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b, at positions spaced apart by the same distance from each exit. If game balls are detected (almost) simultaneously by the first ball count switch 437a and the second ball count switch 437b, each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b The game balls are discharged from the exit almost simultaneously, and as a result, the game balls fall almost simultaneously onto the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703.

After step S7206, in step S7207, the value of an entry ball counter serving as a first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is incremented by 2. Thereafter, the monitoring timer is set in step S7205 described above, and then this processing is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7208 whether or not the second ball entry count switch 437b is detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7208, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7208 is affirmative, in step S7209, a message is sent to the sub-control device 262 to inform that the ball has entered the second ball entry opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. Set the 2-ball entry command.

After step S7209, in step S7204 described above, the value of the ball entry counter is incremented by 1, and in step S7205, a monitoring timer is set, and then this process ends.

Note that when the sub-control device 262 side receives the first ball entry command, it derives a normal ball entry sound effect and also outputs a first ball entry sound effect (not shown) arranged behind the first wing section 714 of the route distribution device 703. When the ball entry lamp is turned on and a second ball entry command is received, a normal ball entry sound effect is derived, and a second ball entry lamp (not shown) placed behind the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703 is activated. When the lamps are turned on and both ball entry commands are received, a special ball entry sound effect is generated and the first ball entry lamp and the second ball entry lamp are blinked rapidly.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be explained with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the special ball entry detection switch 461. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not a jackpot state is in progress, with reference to a jackpot flag to be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the process is immediately terminated. That is, during the jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the safe passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the special entry ball detection switch 461, the The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether or not a special winning flag indicating that the special entry detection switch 461 has been detected has already been turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the process ends immediately. In other words, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), even if the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected again, the The jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7303 is negative, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends. In this embodiment, at the stage when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and it is not determined which type of jackpot state will be given. In addition, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then the process ends.

Next, the early detection process in step S309 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, in step S7502, a 15R jackpot flag indicating a 15-round jackpot, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7-round jackpot, or a 3R jackpot flag indicating a 3-round jackpot is set. It is determined whether any of the jackpot flags is set on.

If a negative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the type of jackpot state has not yet been determined, in step S7503, the 3R early detection switch 753 indicates that the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 has been performed. After setting the detection flag to ON, the process moves to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the type of jackpot state has already been determined, the process directly proceeds to step S7504.

In the subsequent step S7504, the value of the ball entering counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S7505, the value of the ball jamming counter as a second counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is incremented by 1. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined in step S7506 whether or not the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7506, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7506, it is determined in step S7507 whether any of the 15R jackpot flag, 7R jackpot flag, or 3R jackpot flag is set to ON.

When a negative determination is made in step S7507, in step S7508, a 7R early detection flag indicating that the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754 has been performed is set to ON, and then the process moves to step S7504. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7507, the process directly moves to step S7504. As described above, in step S7504, the value of the ball entering counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S7505, the value of the ball jamming counter is incremented by 1, and then this process is ended.

Next, the type entry process of step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether the special winning flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, a 15R jackpot flag indicating a 15 round jackpot is set on in step S7603.

Thereafter, in step S7604, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7R jackpot is set on in step S7606. After that, in step S7607, the value of the ball jam counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, a 3R jackpot flag indicating a 3-round jackpot is set on in step S7609. Thereafter, in step S7607 described above, the value of the ball clogging counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process is ended.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step S111 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S111 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step S111.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display device 43, the second starting prize device 33b, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each sub-side device. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device.

For example, when displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner by the decorative pattern display device 42, a variable pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43, and is a command in this embodiment. Corresponds to information. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode on the decorative pattern display device 42. An instruction is issued to the control device 45.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the following step S204, accessory jackpot setting processing is executed. In this process, a game ball that enters the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the special pocket part 416a of the rotating unit 410 and is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461, etc. Settings etc. are performed. Details of this accessory jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set to determine what kind of control is to be performed on the special display device 43, and jackpot determination and the setting of the performance pattern of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 are also performed. be exposed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32, are set. As a result, when a jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, a blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control details of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control content of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step S209, trigger-based unit control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the starting winning device 33 is set, which is what kind of control is to be performed in the starting winning device 33. Details of the trigger-based unit control process will be described later.

In step S210, remaining ball monitoring processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to confirm whether or not the game ball exists in the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37. Details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

In step S211, advance effect processing is executed. In this process, after the right to generate a jackpot state is granted by the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37, the jackpot type is determined, and the deterioration of the game tempo due to the time lag until the jackpot state starts is avoided. Processing is performed to suppress this. Details of the advance performance processing will be described later.

In step S212, accessory drive processing is performed. In this process, the rotating body unit 410, slide unit 721, and type sorting device 741 of the central winning unit 37 are operated. That is, for the rotary body unit 410, the rotary body 414 is rotated at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and for the slide unit 721, the slide member 722 is slid left and right at a predetermined rhythm (reciprocating movement). The type sorting device 741 is controlled to rotate the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 counterclockwise in a front view at a predetermined rhythm.

Thereafter, in step S213, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214 it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After the processing, the process moves to step S213. In other words, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S216 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S218. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step S219, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step S213 is performed at a timing that is the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps S201 to S212, or the end of one cycle of the process in step S215 that is performed within the remaining time. is being executed. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step S216), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the accessory jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special ball entering detection switch 461 is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1502 and the special winning flag is turned off.

In the subsequent step 1503, it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set on. If the determination in step S1503 is affirmative, in step S1504, a round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15". Further, in step S1505, a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is in progress is set on, and in step S1506, a first variable flag indicating that opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is being controlled is set on. In addition, in step S1507, the first variable timer used for opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to "7500", and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process is ended. do.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a 7R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510.

After step S1510, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not a preliminary opening effect, which will be described in detail later, is being performed. Incidentally, the opening performance is a performance performed at the beginning of the jackpot state to announce the start of (and to excite) the jackpot state. On the other hand, the advance opening effect means that the game ball that has entered the 3R guidance passage 743 or the 7R guidance passage 745 has not yet been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. Regardless of the state, it is certain that such a game ball will eventually be detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the corresponding jackpot state will be given. A pseudo performance imitating the opening performance derived for the purpose of teaching that a corresponding jackpot state will occur when the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection switch 754 is detected. It is. In this embodiment, although the advance opening performance is not performed during the period of the jackpot state, almost the same aspects as the opening performance (display aspect of the decorative symbol display device 42, audio aspect, lighting manner of various lamps) are derived. It is configured as follows.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, settings are made in step S1512 to execute the jackpot state of the 3R jackpot (or 7R jackpot) in a "shortened pattern". As will be described in detail later, the jackpot states of 3R jackpot and 7R jackpot include a normal pattern in which an opening period for performing an opening effect is set, and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted. Therefore, when a preliminary opening performance is being performed, a pattern that omits the jackpot opening performance is selected instead to avoid the opening performance from becoming too long.

After step S1512, or if a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process moves to step S1505 described above.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not a 3R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514. Thereafter, the process moves to step S1511 described above.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S801, a jackpot flag is referred to to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot is in progress, the process ends immediately. That is, during the jackpot state, no new variable display is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a special winning flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 is on. The special winning flag is turned on when the special winning ball detection switch 461 is detected (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is turned off when the jackpot flag is turned on (see below for the accessory (See step S1502 of the jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the open fluctuation flag is set on. In addition, the fluctuation flag during opening is set when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position based on a small hit, and when the center winning unit 37 is in the open state (the specific area 401 is open), when the specific area 401 is entered. The ball is still in the specific area 401, and the special winning flag is turned on and is not in a jackpot state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the process ends immediately. In other words, when the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the special display device 43 does not display the variable display.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, then in step S804, the setting status of the first display flag is checked to determine whether or not the special display device 43 is undergoing variable display. When the first displaying flag is set to on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed, and when the first displaying flag is turned off, it is considered that a variable display is not being performed. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display on the special display device 43 (see step S808), and is turned on when the variable display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S808). (see step S812).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, the jackpot state, the jackpot state right has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the special display device 43 is changing the display, and the central winning unit 37 is not in any of the open states, the process advances to step S805, and if the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by the ball entering the starting winning device 33a, 33b is less than 0. Determine whether it is large or not. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variable display is stored on hold, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, processing for shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and from the second pending area to the pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area. In addition, in the shift process, not only the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are used, but also the values of the jackpot occurrence flag, the losing flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 second fluctuation flag. The on/off settings of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the following step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the fluctuation information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether or not the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. As a modified example, in the same manner as in the winning process of the starting winning process, the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is determined to be a value corresponding to a jackpot by once again considering the winning/failure judging table. It may be determined whether or not the value is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if you win a "big hit" in the winning/failure lottery, then in step S902, a direct hit indicating that you have won a "jackpot" in the winning/failure lottery (a "direct jackpot"). Set the jackpot flag on. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is sent to send the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) also to the sub-control device 262. Configure settings. In the following step S905, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. Note that the first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a fluctuation pattern that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes a jackpot (jackpot shortening pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the subsequent step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "missing" by determining whether the outgoing flag in the execution area is set on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same way as the success/failure judgment process of the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" or not, thereby determining whether or not the winning random number counter C1 is "1". It may also be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if the result is "missing", it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that is an outlier (an outlier fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262 as well. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern that results in a failure by shortening the fluctuation time (deviation shortened pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade release flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same manner as the propriety determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may also be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a long small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small win", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (a variation pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Further, in step S930, an opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a short small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 second. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that variable display is in progress on the special display device 43 is set on. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if an affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809, and a first display timer subtraction process is performed. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into account the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, then in step S811 a switching display setting is made to continue the switching display (fluctuating display) of the special display device 43, and the process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, if it is time to stop the variable display on the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, stop display settings are made to perform a stop display on the special display device 43. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", the plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed in a stopped state (for example, lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a "miss" is displayed. If it is a "miss", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "miss", if it is a "long small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win", and if it is a "short small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win". The display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short hit".

In the following step S814, discrimination information setting processing is performed. Details of the discrimination information setting process will be described later. After step S814, this process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 25.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the direct hit jackpot flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/fail lottery, jackpot settings are performed from step S1002 onwards.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is in progress as a special gaming state is set on.

In the subsequent step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (big winning hole) is in an open state is set on. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is turned on, the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer is set, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32, and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this example, "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state has occurred, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to "direct jackpot".

In the following step S1006, a winning counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is set, and then the process ends. In this example, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as the value. In addition, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and if a ball has entered the variable winning device 32. When it is determined, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1.

Further, in step S1001, if it is determined that it does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, the process moves to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time saving mode is such that after the end of the jackpot state, the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, and as described later, after the end of the jackpot, "4" is set as the counter value. .

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process moves to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the variation counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the fourth variable display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", processing is performed to turn off the time reduction mode flag in step S1010, processing to turn on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot by considering the jackpot flag. If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process advances to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. In S1204, it is determined whether there is an open time of the variable winning device 32 per round that is set when the first variable flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process advances to step S1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0", that is, the number of game balls won into the variable winning device 32 per round. It is determined whether a predetermined number (eight in this example) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to check whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0", that is, the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). ) has reached the specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the termination setting process will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the predetermined number, round forwarding processing is performed in step S1208, and the present processing ends. In the round feed process, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable prize winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of rounds executed reaches a prescribed number of times set in advance. Further, in the round sending process, the first variable flag is turned off and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set in the first variable timer.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209, and it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer. Set the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8"). If a negative determination is made in step S1209, and if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 becomes open. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 is brought into a closed state.

Here, the termination setting process in step S1207 will be explained with reference to FIG. 27.

First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time saving mode flag is set to ON. That is, in this embodiment, the time reduction mode is provided after the jackpot state of all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot", "15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot" ends. It is configured as follows.

After step S1303, the normal mode flag is turned off in step S1304. After that, in step S1305, the number of fluctuation counter is set to "4", and then the process moves to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time reduction mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing is performed to turn off various jackpot flags. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether the blade opening flag (see step S908 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released due to a "small win" win, the process moves to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". In addition, as mentioned above, when it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer is set to the same time as the variation time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43. A value is set (see step S913, step S916, step S920, and step S923). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, an affirmative determination is made in the determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, the opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and in step S1806, the blade member 404 is in the open state. Perform the processing to make it.

Thereafter, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1808. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1809. After steps S1808 and S1809, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing to close the blade member 404 has arrived, the open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. In step S1814, the blade member 404 is brought into a closed state, and then the present process ends.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of switching display (variable display). Determine whether Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing switching display (variable display) on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 is different between the time shortening mode in which the ball enters into a high state and the normal mode. A value "125" corresponding to .5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "2500" corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the second display timer. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "2500" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display A switching display is started in the device 41. Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106, and a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

The process then proceeds to step S2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step S2108, and in step S2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C3, "1 to 8" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, where a normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the starting winning device 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning device 33b, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is different between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the normal mode, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the second variable timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set to the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, a switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41, and this process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display a lit "○" or "-" as a normal symbol, and if the current lighting is "○", "-" or "-" is displayed. If so, the display is switched to "○". As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the trigger-based unit control process in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second starting winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the second starting winning device 33b is in an open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2203, in which it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process moves to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on/off state of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning device 33b in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning device 33b (the solenoid that drives it), and the second starting winning device 33b becomes open. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning device 33b, and the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S210 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. First, in step S7101, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is "0".

As described above, the "ball entry counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the ball entry count switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 3R early detection switch 753, and , 7R is subtracted by 1 based on the detection of the early detection switch 754. Further, the "ball clogging counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. 1 is subtracted. In other words, the ball entry counter of this embodiment is located downstream of the ball entry count switch 437 in the specific area 401 and from the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734. The player is also configured to count the number of game balls existing in the upstream range.

If a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the last time a game ball entered the specific area 401 is set to " 0". In this embodiment, when a ball enters the specific area 401, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball enters the specific area 401. In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 until it is ejected, more specifically, from when the game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437 until the game ball is The time required for detection by the special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds.

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7103, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 until it is ejected has elapsed, the entry counter (or If the value of the ball clogging counter) is not "0" and it is possible that a ball clogging has occurred within the specific area 401, error notification processing is performed in step S7104. Specifically, for example, control is performed such as lighting an error lamp, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process ends.

In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7105, the number of game balls that are present in the 3R guidance passage 743 and 7R guidance passage 745 provided in the specific area 401 (type lottery area 408) is determined. It is determined whether the value of the clog counter is "0" or not. As mentioned above, the "ball clogging counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry detection switch. 735 is detected, 1 is subtracted. In other words, the ball clogging counter of this embodiment is configured to connect the 3R guide passage 743 downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the 7R early detection switch 754 in the specific area 401. It is configured to count the number of game balls present in the 7R guidance passage 745 on the downstream side and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, that is, if it is determined that no game ball remains within the specific area 401, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7105, the process moves to step S7102 described above.

Next, the advance effect processing in step S211 will be explained with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether the 3R early detection flag indicating that the 3R early detection switch 753 has detected has been set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7702 whether the value of the ball entry counter is 0 or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, that is, in the specific area 401, the ball enters the out passage 428, the 15R ball entrance 731, the 3R guidance passage 743, and the 7R guidance passage 745 even though the ball has not entered the ball yet. If there is no game ball that could potentially cause a ball jam, in step S7703, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball jam counter is 1. It is determined whether or not there are only game balls. If a negative determination is made in step S7703, that is, if there are game balls in the specific area 401 other than the game balls detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 (downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 in the specific area 401), There are two or more game balls in the area on the side and upstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. If a game ball exists or is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 and exists in the specific area 401, an error state occurs in which it is determined that no game ball exists in the specific area 401. ), the process ends immediately. Note that if it is determined that no game ball exists in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

The time required from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is approximately 8 seconds, and when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754. The time required from then until the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 detects it is approximately 4 seconds.

In addition, the time required from when a game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437 until it is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 is approximately 17 seconds to 22 seconds, and when the game ball is detected by the entering ball counting switch 437 The time required from when a game ball is detected until it is detected by the 7R ball entering detection switch 735 is approximately 22 seconds to 26 seconds. The time required for this to be detected is approximately 26 to 30 seconds.

In other words, if there is no game ball in the specific area 401 when the 3R early detection switch 753 detects, the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736. There is no possibility that another game ball will be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 before the ball enters the ball.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, that is, if the only game ball present in the specific area 401 is the one ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, in step S7704, the sub-control device 262 Processing is performed to set a 3R advance opening command for deriving an opening performance corresponding to a "3 round jackpot" prior to the start of the jackpot state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if there is no other game ball in the specific area 401 at the time when the game ball enters the 3R guide path 743, the occurrence of the 3 round jackpot is certain, but if the game ball It takes about 8 seconds from when the ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when it is detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 (in addition, the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745 are relatively difficult to see due to the covering cover 756). ing). Therefore, even though the occurrence of the three-round jackpot situation is certain, the player may feel uncomfortable that the jackpot situation does not start for a long time. Therefore, in step S7704, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the opening performance announcing the start of the jackpot state is derived to eliminate such concerns.

The jackpot state is an opening period in which the start of the jackpot state is taught, and a period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and a round period that is set multiple times, and a period in which the variable winning device 32 is set during the round period. There is an interval period, which is a closed state, and an ending period, which indicates the end of the jackpot state. In the opening period, an opening performance is performed.

The sub-control device 262 that receives the 3R advance opening command performs processing to derive an opening performance corresponding to a "3 round jackpot", but it does not start a 3 round jackpot state, but only a jackpot. It merely derives a performance for teaching the start of a state (it does not have the meaning of an opening period; in that respect, it is a pseudo-opening performance). The 3rd round jackpot state starts when a game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736.

In addition, the opening performance derived based on reception of the 3R advance opening command (hereinafter referred to as "preceding opening performance") is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, and then detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, It connects the period until the jackpot state starts, and its derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball, etc.). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is about 8 seconds. On the other hand, in the advance opening performance corresponding to the 3R jackpot, a series of performance modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening performance) are derived in the first half (for example, from 0 seconds to 7 seconds), and in the second half. (For example, after 7 seconds), a short performance mode is repeatedly derived so that even if it is interrupted at any time, it will be connected to the performance of the subsequent round period and it will not feel strange (loop video, still image can be used as a variation) is derived.

Furthermore, for the 3rd round jackpot and the 7th round jackpot, a normal pattern (first opening pattern) in which an opening period is provided and a shortened pattern (second opening pattern) in which the opening period is omitted are set. . In this embodiment, the shortened pattern is selected when the preceding opening effect has been derived. For example, the first opening pattern for a 3rd round jackpot and a 7th round jackpot is set to "7 seconds", and a series of moving images is derived. The second opening pattern for the 3rd round jackpot is set to "0 seconds". The second opening pattern for the 7 round jackpot is set to "3 seconds", and a loop video is derived following the opening performance derived based on reception of a 7R advance opening command, which will be described later.

After step S7704, the 3R early detection flag is turned off in step S7705, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, that is, a game in which the ball has not entered any of the out passage 428, the 15R ball entrance 731, the 3R guidance passage 743, and the 7R guidance passage 745 in the specific area 401. If there is a ball (there is a game ball that may soon enter any of the 15R ball entrance 731, 3R guidance passage 743, and 7R guidance passage 745), in step S7706, the sub A promotion acceptance display command is sent to the control device 262 to derive a promotion acceptance display meaning something like ``A 3R jackpot is scheduled to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot.'' Set.

That is, for example, if two game balls enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball enters the 3R guidance passage 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guidance passage 746, the preceding game ball There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 before the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detects the ball, so when the 3R early detection switch 753 detects , instead of performing a pre-opening performance that says a 3R jackpot will occur, a promotion reception display indicating that a promotion is being accepted (promotion acceptance state) such as that there is a possibility of a better jackpot occurring. We are trying to derive the following.

As a result, an effect can be performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 etc. at the stage when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, and after the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the predetermined round ball entry detection switch is activated. It is possible to avoid a situation where a relatively long time lag occurs without any particular reaction corresponding to the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 until the detections of 734, 735, and 736 are performed. After step S7706, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and then the process ends. In this embodiment, the function of deriving the promotion acceptance display to the decorative pattern display device 42 constitutes promotion acceptance state teaching means. Further, the function of deriving the promotion acceptance display and the advance opening effect constitutes early teaching means.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the 7R early detection flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7707, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, it is determined in step S7708 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7708, it is determined in step S7709 whether the value of the ball clogging counter is 1 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7709, that is, if the only game ball present in the specific area 401 is the one ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754, in step S7710, the sub-control device 262 Processing is performed to set a 7R advance opening command for deriving an opening performance corresponding to a "7 round jackpot" prior to the start of the jackpot state. After step S7710, in step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and then the process ends.

In addition, the opening performance derived based on the reception of the 7R advance opening command connects the period from when it is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 until it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 and the jackpot state starts. The derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball, etc.). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 until it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is about 5 seconds. On the other hand, in the advance opening performance corresponding to the 7R jackpot, a series of performance modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening performance) are derived in the first half (for example, from 0 seconds to 4 seconds), and in the second half. (For example, after 4 seconds), a performance mode (still image is also possible) in which a short production mode (video) is repeatedly derived is derived so that even if it is interrupted at any time, it will be connected to the production of the subsequent round period and there will be no discomfort. Ru.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7709, that is, if there are game balls in the specific area 401 other than the game balls detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 (out of the 3R early detection switch 753 in the specific area 401), 2 game balls are downstream and upstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. An error state has occurred in which it is determined that there are no game balls in the specific area 401 even though there are more than one game ball in the specific area 401, or there are game balls detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 in the specific area 401. ), step S7710 is skipped, the process moves to step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and the process ends. Note that if it is determined that no game ball exists in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S7708, in step S7712, the sub-control device 262 is informed that "7R jackpot is scheduled to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot." Set a promotion acceptance display command to derive a promotion acceptance display with a meaning such as: Thereafter, in step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and then the process ends.

Note that the processing in steps S7702, S7703, S7708, and S7709 constitutes the uncertain element determination processing, and the processing in steps S7704 and S7710 for setting the advance opening command and the processing based on the reception of the advance opening command The process of deriving the preceding opening performance constitutes the preceding opening process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 33, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the subsequent step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if an abnormality in backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step S3115 onward. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step S3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is checked after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process in step S3201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process in step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and set the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 35. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state setting is executed, and when the lower plate is no longer full, the lower plate full status is released. Perform state settings. Further, in step S3206, a tank ball absent state (bulb out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition, the no-tank-bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. In addition, as mentioned above, the starting command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a (setting of the first starting winning flag), and changing information corresponding to a jackpot. Information indicating whether there is a big hit occurrence flag (setting of the jackpot occurrence flag), information indicating whether the fluctuating display corresponds to a long small hit or short small win (setting of the long small winning occurrence flag or short small winning occurrence flag), and responding to a miss. information indicating whether or not the variable display is a variable display (outlier flag setting), information indicating the variation time of the variable display (setting a 2 second variation flag, 3 second variation flag, 7 second variation flag, 0.1 second flag) is included.

Further, the hold information storage area, like the special variable hold area of the main controller 261, includes four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, variation information included in the preceding command is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variation display (information stored in the special variation pending area). By employing this configuration, the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261.

Here, the reservation information storage process in step S3903 will be explained with reference to FIG. 38.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on fluctuation time, etc. included in the first command is stored in the first vacant holding area of the holding information storage area. Store in area. Thereafter, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display are acquired, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After performing the process in step S4104, or if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process moves to step S4105, and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command has been received (or whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). whether or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, one is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Np in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding information storage area to the execution area side, from the first holding area to the execution area. , the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reservation area → first reservation area, third reservation area → second reservation area, fourth reservation area → third reservation area.

After performing the process in step S4107, or if a negative determination is made in step S4205, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process moves to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variable pattern command. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

In step S3906, it is also checked whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "100" is set in the variation counter in the termination setting process or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command containing that fact is the main command. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 displays the remaining number of times on the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the command information.

Note that the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of a variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a jackpot, and the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The necessary display commands are generated each time based on the information. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 can be roughly divided into a group of normal variable data, a group of reach effect data, etc., and basically each data constituting these data groups is linked to the variable time timer. By sequentially outputting the data in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the data, display effects are performed according to various fluctuation patterns. For example, the normal variation data group consists of normal variation data 1, normal variation data 2, ..., normal variation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., reach effect data. n, data output is performed sequentially in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and then, with the start of reach performance, reach performance data 1 → 2 → Data output is performed sequentially in the order of ...→n.

Note that the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the sub control is executed until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3906 reaches 0). The effect display is continued under cooperation between the device 262 and the display control device 45.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demonstration set to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed without a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 on the decorative pattern display device 42) is performed. Performs other processing such as control settings for screen display).

In step 3910, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps S3905 to 3909. For example, when causing the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3910, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process moves to step S3911, and it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step S3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the central winning unit 37 includes a normal passage 701 that guides game balls that have entered the specific area 401 to the most upstream part of the win/fail lottery area 407, and a There is a special passage 702 that guides the entered game balls to the midstream part of the win/fail lottery area 407, and when the game balls pass through the special passage 702, a slide unit 721 determines whether or not the game balls fall into the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid sorting by Therefore, compared to the normal passage 701, the special passage 702 is a passage where the game ball that enters the specific area 401 has a higher possibility of reaching the rotating body 414, and furthermore, the ball enters the special pocket part 416a and is specially This path has a high possibility of reaching the safe path 427 where the ball entry detection switch 461 is installed (high expectation of jackpot).

Furthermore, a branch point between a normal guide section 704 that guides game balls that have entered the specific area 401 to a normal passage 701 and a special guide section 705 that guides game balls that have entered the specific area 401 to a special passage 702. , a route distribution device 703 is provided. The route sorting device 703 of this embodiment has a shaft portion 713 rotatably supported around a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction, and a shaft portion 713 that moves leftward from the shaft portion 713 in a reference posture that is in equilibrium. A first wing portion 714 protrudes toward the shaft portion 713, and a second wing portion 715 protrudes toward the right side from the shaft portion 713.

When the game balls are guided one by one to the route distribution device 703 and fall onto the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715, the weight of the game balls causes the route distribution device 703 to rotates to the left or right. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surfaces) of the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703 in the rotational posture are configured to communicate with the normal guide section 704, A game ball that has fallen onto the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715 is guided to the normal guide section 704 and, in turn, to the normal passage 701.

On the other hand, game balls enter the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 (first ball entry opening 403a, second ball entry opening 403b) at almost the same time, and the pair of left and right introduction passages 718 ( Two game balls are simultaneously guided from the first introduction passage 718a, second introduction passage 718b) to the route distribution device 703, and the two game balls fall simultaneously to the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715. In this case, the weight on the first wing section 714 side and the weight on the second wing section 715 side are balanced, so that the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is maintained. Guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surfaces) of the first wing section 714 or the second wing section 715 of the route sorting device 703 in the standard attitude are configured to communicate with the pair of left and right special guide sections 705, respectively. The game balls that have fallen onto the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 are both guided to the special guide section 705, and in turn are guided to the special passage 702.

Thereby, it is possible to make a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 at once and to increase the expectation that the balls will enter the special pocket section 416a. For this reason, the player's expectation that since a plurality of game balls are entered into the specific area 401 at once will be advantageous in entering the game balls into the special pocket section 416a, and the actual By guiding a plurality of game balls to the special passage 702, it is possible to increase the expectation that the balls will enter the special pocket section 416a. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where even if a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 at once, it does not contribute at all to the jackpot expectation level, or in fact it decreases. It is possible to derive the behavior of the game balls that meets the player's expectation that the expectation of a jackpot will be improved by letting the game balls enter the ball all at once.

Further, for example, in the route distribution device 703, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution device 703, and the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact. In addition, compared to a configuration in which a switch and drive means for detecting game balls are used to change the route depending on whether or not there are multiple game balls, doubts that may cause players to feel distrust may arise. It is possible to reduce the number of errors and to appeal to fairness.

Furthermore, a pair of ball entry openings 403 (a first ball entry opening 403a, a second ball entry opening 403b) are provided, and a game ball that enters a specific area through the first ball entry opening 403a is A game ball that has entered the specific area 401 through the first introduction passage 718a that guides it to the first wing section 714 (falls it onto the guide surface 714a of the first wing section 714) and the second ball entry opening 403b. A second introduction passage 718b that guides the liquid to the second wing part 715 (falls onto the guide surface 715a of the second wing part 715) is provided. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chances of the game ball coming into contact with the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 at the same time, or to set the position where the game ball is dropped to a suitable position. Therefore, the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 will all be guided to the special passage 702 can be increased. Further, it is also possible to provide a game feature in which the game ball is launched (aimed, desired) so that the game ball enters the left and right ball entry openings 403a, 403b.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 through the safe passage 427, and then outside the gaming area (specific area 401). Instead of being ejected into the designated area 401, the lottery area 408 is configured to enter a type lottery area 408 that is a part of the specific area 401. Then, a jackpot state is determined in which of the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, and 3R ball entrance 733 provided in the type lottery area 408 the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 enters. An analog lottery (type lottery) is now held to determine the type of the game. Therefore, when game balls consecutively enter the two special pockets 416a of the rotating body 414, the jackpot condition is detected by the special entry ball detection switch 461 first among the game balls that continuously pass. All of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball entry detection switch 461 almost consecutively can be used for the subsequent type lottery, although the number of game balls corresponds to the number of game balls that have been entered.

Furthermore, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, which triggers the occurrence of a "3 round jackpot", is the time when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. It is configured to be longer than the time from when the ball is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, which triggers the occurrence of a "7 round jackpot". In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 to when it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, which triggers the occurrence of a "7 round jackpot," is determined by the time when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. It is configured to be longer than the time from when the 15R ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, which triggers the occurrence of the "15 round jackpot".

For this reason, for example, among a plurality of game balls that have entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 (in quick succession), the preceding game ball heads toward the 3R ball entry opening 733 (3R ball entry detection switch 736). , even if the subsequent game ball heads toward the 15R ball entry port 731 (15R ball entry detection switch 734), the subsequent game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731 (15R ball entry detection switch 734) first. (detection), it is possible to generate a 15-round jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the subsequent game balls can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's feelings of loss and waste when the game balls continuously enter the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and also suppress the decrease in interest caused by this. I can do it.

In addition, in the type lottery area 408, there is a 3R guidance passage 743 that leads game balls to the 3R ball entrance 733, a 7R guidance passage 745 that leads the game balls to the 7R ball entrance 732, and a 15R guidance passage 745 that leads the game balls to the 7R ball entrance 732. A 15R guide passage 746 leading to the ball mouth 731 is provided. Furthermore, a first spanning board 744 that distributes the game balls that have entered the type lottery area 408 to either the 3R guiding passage 743 or other guiding passages 745 and 746; A second passing plate 747 is provided for distributing game balls that are not distributed to either the 7R guide path 745 or the 15R guide path 746. In other words, although the entrance of the 3R guidance passage 743 is located upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 7R guidance passage 745, the 3R guidance passage 743 It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through is longer than the path 745 (in the above example, the distance the game ball moves is longer). Furthermore, although the entrance of the 7R guidance passage 745 is located upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 15R guidance passage 746, the 7R guidance passage 745 It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the passage 746.

Therefore, if the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is not guided to the 3R guidance path 743 by the first passing plate 744 (not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the 3R guidance path 743), the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is When the game ball is guided to the second spanning board 747 and is not further guided to the 7R guiding passage 745 by the second spanning board 747 (not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the 7R guiding passage 745), The game ball is guided to a 15R guiding passage 746. In other words, among the 3R guidance passage 743, 7R ball entrance 732, and 15R guidance passage 746, the entrance of the passage that can be expected to lead to a more advantageous jackpot state for the player is located downstream of the type lottery area 408. By placing them on the side (so that those who stay till the end will get better results), you can expect the game to be more exciting. Particularly, in this embodiment, since the game balls are sorted in two stages in the type lottery area 408, this effect is more pronounced.

Also, among the 3R guidance passage 743, 7R guidance passage 745, and 15R guidance passage 746, the entrance of the passage is more likely to lead to a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. 408, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball is placed on the first passing board 744 and the second passing board 744. Even if the following game ball is guided to the 15R guidance path 746 side by the plate 747, if the following game ball is guided to the 3R guidance path 743 side by the first spanning board 744, the subsequent game ball will be guided to the 3R guidance path faster. It ends up reaching the passage 743.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to pass through the 3R guidance passage 743 is longer than that of the 7R guidance passage 745, and the time required for the game ball to pass through the 7R guidance passage 745 is longer than that of the 15R guidance passage 746. It is designed to take a long time to pass through. For this reason, for example, even though the preceding game ball was guided to the 15R guidance path 746 (7R guidance path 745), the following game ball was guided to the 3R guidance path 743 or 7R guidance path 745 (3R guidance path 745). 743), and before the preceding game ball enters the 15R guidance path 746 (7R guidance path 745), the following game ball enters the 3R guidance path 743 or 7R guidance path 745 (3R guidance path 743). It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation where a ball enters the ball and a 3rd round jackpot or a 7th round jackpot (3rd round jackpot) occurs.

In particular, in this embodiment, when two game balls enter the specific area 401 at almost the same time, such as when the game balls enter the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 at the same time, these game balls All of the game balls are easily guided to the special passage 702, and as a result, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will enter the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 in succession. Therefore, in this configuration, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration in which a plurality of game balls consecutively entering the special pocket part 416a is not wasted, the special pocket part 416a (and by extension, the type lottery area 408) The effect of suppressing the decline in interest caused by a plurality of game balls being wasted or lost even if a plurality of game balls are hit in succession can be more effectively achieved.

Further, a 3R early detection switch 753 that detects a game ball moving in the 3R guidance path 743 and a 7R early detection switch 754 that detects a game ball moving in the 7R guidance path 745 are provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753 or , 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, in the specific area 401, downstream of ball entry count switch 437, and 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry It is determined whether or not a game ball exists in the area upstream of the detection switch 734 (determination as to whether the value of the ball entry counter is "0") (see the preceding performance process in FIG. 32). Here, if it is determined that there is no game ball in this area, furthermore, in the specific area 401, an area downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch. , and determine whether the number of game balls existing in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch is one (if the value of the ball jam counter is 1) is performed. Here, if it is determined that there is one game ball, that is, it is determined that the only game ball existing in the specific area 401 is the one that was detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754. In this case, the system is configured to derive a preliminary opening performance that imitates the opening performance that teaches the start of a jackpot state.

In other words, although it is certain that a game ball that enters the 3R guidance passage 743 or 7R guidance passage 745 will enter the 3R ball entrance 733 or 7R entrance 732, Since the game ball is constructed so that the passage time for the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guidance path 746, the game ball enters the 3R guidance path 743 or 7R guidance path 745 before entering the 3R ball entrance 733 or 7R entrance. It is conceivable that a relatively long time lag occurs until the ball enters the ball 732 (until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735). In this case, for example, when a game ball enters the special pocket part 416a single-shot and further enters the 3R guidance passage 743 or 7R guidance passage 745, the corresponding 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot occurs at this point. Despite the fact that the game ball has passed through the 3R guidance passage 743 or the 7R guidance passage 745, it takes a relatively long time. This takes time and may lead to a situation where the jackpot state does not start.

In this regard, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection switch 754 installed in the 3R guidance path 743 or 7R guidance path 745, the game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or There is a possibility that another game ball will be detected by the 3R ball entering detection switch 736, 7R ball entering detection switch 735, or 15R ball entering detection switch 734 before being detected by the 7R ball entering detection switch 735. If not, at that point, a preliminary opening performance indicating the occurrence of a 3R jackpot or a 7R jackpot is derived, so such concerns can be eliminated. Therefore, it takes too much time (there is no reaction) after the type of jackpot state is determined to be 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot until the jackpot state starts (there is no reaction), and the tempo of the game is slow. It is possible to prevent situations such as a decline in interest and the like.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that only game balls detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 are present in the specific area 401, the advance opening performance for the 3-round jackpot, Alternatively, it is configured to derive a preliminary opening effect for a 7-round jackpot. Therefore, although the type of jackpot state can be taught in the advance opening performance, it is possible to avoid a situation where there is a contradiction between the mode of the advance opening performance and the type of jackpot state that actually occurs. . By configuring the advance opening presentation so that the type of jackpot state can be taught, presentation performance can be improved and a sense of security can be given to the player.

Furthermore, the jackpot state includes a normal pattern and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted, and when setting the jackpot state, if a preceding opening effect has been derived, the shortened pattern is selected. has been done. This makes it possible to prevent the opening performance from becoming too long by further performing an opening performance of a normal length when the preliminary opening performance is being performed. Therefore, problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game can be more reliably avoided.

In addition, the value is added based on the detection of the ball entry count switch 437, and the detection of the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. A ball entry counter whose value is subtracted based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and a 7R early detection switch 754, and a value is added based on the detection of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entry counter. A ball clogging counter whose value is subtracted based on detection by the detection switch 735 is provided. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls existing in the specific area 401, determine whether or not a ball jam has occurred, or use the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch in the specific area 401. It is possible to determine whether or not there are game balls other than the game balls detected by the switch 754. Therefore, it is possible to handle errors caused by ball jams, improve the accuracy of advance opening performances, and increase the amount of information for advance opening performances, thereby improving gameplay and performance. .

Furthermore, when the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is 0 or not, and if it is determined that it is not 0, it is a jackpot state. A promotion acceptance display indicating that the promotion acceptance state is in which the type has not yet been determined is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Therefore, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 and the preceding game ball enters the 3R guidance path 743, it has not yet been determined that a 3-round jackpot will occur. Make sure that players are aware that the configuration is such that unless a subsequent game ball enters the 3R guidance path 743, there is still a possibility that a jackpot situation such as a 7th round jackpot or a 15th round jackpot will occur. be able to. Therefore, the gameplay can be more reliably understood, and when a situation like the above example occurs, it is possible to understand the behavior of subsequent game balls and the continuous entry of game balls into the type lottery area 408. You can get people to have a stronger interest in things like this.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection of the first incoming ball count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a and the detection of the second incoming ball count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b are simultaneously performed. It is configured to derive different effects depending on whether it is performed or performed alone. Therefore, the player can recognize and enjoy the joyful moment when two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a translucent material is arranged to cover the front of the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745 (a translucent material that reduces the visibility of the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745). ) A covering cover 756 (see FIG. 4) is provided as covering means. As a result, the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the 3R guide path 743 and the 7R guide path 745. Therefore, the entrances of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 can be likened to the entrances of the 3R ball entry port 731 and the 7R ball entry port 732. Therefore, basically, it is easier to understand the premise of the gameplay that if a ball enters the entrance of the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745, a jackpot state of "3R jackpot" or "7R jackpot" will occur. can do. In addition, it is possible to prevent the design from deteriorating or the type lottery area 408 to look complicated due to the visibility of the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745, which are shaped to delay the game ball. I can do it.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a) In the above embodiment, the configuration of the route distribution device 703 that distributes game balls that have entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 (normal guide section 704) or the special passage 702 (special guide section 705) is particularly important. It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the reference posture of the route sorting device 703 is a posture that can guide the game ball to the special passage 702, and by maintaining the reference posture when guiding the game ball, the game ball is configured to be guided to the special passage 702, but the reference posture of the route distribution device 703 is such that the game ball can be guided to the normal passage 701, and the game ball is guided (without contact with the game ball). It may be configured such that the game ball is guided to the special passage 702 by changing to a posture in which the game ball can be guided to the special passage 702 when the game ball is played. Next, an example of the route distribution device will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

(a-1) The route distribution device 901 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 includes a base plate 902 attached to the front side of the game board 30 and a distribution plate 903 rotatably provided with respect to the base plate 902. We are prepared. The distribution plate 903 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing part 904 extending in the left-right direction, a plate-shaped front piece part 905 that projects forward from the bearing part 904, and a plate-shaped rear piece part 906 that projects rearward from the bearing part 904. It is equipped with A cylindrical shaft pin 907 is inserted through the bearing portion 904, and both ends of the shaft pin 907 are configured to be attached to the base plate 902. Thereby, the distribution plate 903 is rotatably attached to the base plate 902.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the shaft pin 907 and the bearing part 904 extend in the horizontal direction, whereas the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 (front piece part 905) is slightly inclined downwardly toward the left. It is extending. Further, as shown in FIG. 43, a weight portion 911 is provided on the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903, and the weight portion 911 is closer to the bearing portion 904 than the portion of the distribution plate 903 on the front side of the bearing portion 904. The rear part is also heavier. Note that the weight portion 911 may be formed integrally with the rear piece portion 906, or the weight portion 911 as a separate member may be attached to the rear piece portion 906.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43, a lower stopper 912 is provided that abuts and supports the lower surface of the distribution plate 903 in a posture with no inclination in the front-rear direction. When no external force is acting on the distribution board 903, such as when a game ball comes into contact with it, the distribution board 903 is maintained in a posture with no tilt in the front-back direction (hereinafter referred to as the "reference posture"). It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, on the upper right side of the distribution board 903 (front piece 905), game balls that entered the center winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) from each ball entry opening 403 are displayed. An outlet 921 of the introduction passage 718 for guiding the sphere is formed. In this embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b merge to form a common outlet 921.

Further, at a position directly below the exit 921 of the introduction passage 718, a game ball discharged from the introduction passage 718 is received and guided to the right end (most upstream part) of the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 (front piece 905). A receiving plate 922 is provided.

Further, on the left side of the distribution board 903 (front piece part 905), a normal guide part 704 that guides the game balls to the normal passage 701 is provided, and below the distribution plate 903 (front piece part 905), a A special guide section 705 is provided to guide the ball to a special passage 702. Normally, the distribution plate 903 is in the standard position, and the special guide section 705 is in a state of being closed by the distribution plate 903.

Then, when the game ball enters the central winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401), the game ball passes through the introduction passage 718, passes through the receiving plate 922, and goes to the front of the distribution plate 903. It is guided to the right side of the upper surface of the piece 905. In this embodiment, the sum of the weight of the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of one game ball is the weight of the rear piece 906 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of the weight part 911. It is constructed in such a way that it weighs less than the total weight.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44(a), even if one game ball is placed on the top surface of the front piece 905, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in the standard posture, and such a game ball is placed on the top surface of the front piece 905. As a result, the user is guided to the normal guide section 704.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(b), when two or more game balls are placed on the top surface of the front piece 905, the sorting plate 903 changes from the standard posture with the front piece 905 facing forward. It is configured to be pivoted into a downwardly tilted pivot position. In other words, in this embodiment, the sum of the weight of the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of two game balls is the weight of the rear piece 906 of the distribution board 903 and the weight of the weight part 911. It is constructed so that it is heavier than the sum of the weight of

Furthermore, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 43, when the distribution plate 903 is displaced to the rotational position, the special guide portion 705 is opened. Therefore, when two or more game balls are placed on the top surface of the front piece part 905, the game balls placed on the top surface of the front piece part 905 are guided to the special guide part 705. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 43, the route distribution device 901 has an upper stopper 913 on the rear side of the base plate 902 that abuts and supports the upper surface of the rear piece 906 of the distribution plate 903 that has been displaced to the rotational position. We are prepared. The distribution plate 903 in contact with the upper stopper 913 is maintained in a posture in which the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 is inclined downwardly toward the front. As a result, after the game ball placed on the upper surface of the front piece part 905 moves to the special guide part 705, the distribution plate 903 is configured to be rotationally displaced to the reference position by the balance of its own weight. .

As described above, in this embodiment as well, when game balls enter the central winning unit 37 (route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401) almost simultaneously or in quick succession, these multiple game balls are In both cases, a route sorting device 703 is provided that guides the ball to the special guide section 705, thereby allowing a plurality of game balls to enter the specific area 401 at once and increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special pocket section 416a. It is possible to match these things. Therefore, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game balls that meets the player's expectation that the jackpot expectation will be improved by letting a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 at once.

(a-2) In the embodiment of (a-1) above, if the number of game balls on the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 is reduced from multiple to one ball, the distribution plate 903 changes from the rotational posture to the reference position. There is a concern that the game ball may get caught between the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the glass unit 137 when trying to return to the posture, but a configuration for preventing this may be added. For example, in front of the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 in the standard posture, it extends from a position below the front piece 905 to a position above the front piece 905, and has approximately the same width as the front piece 905. It is also possible to provide a relatively lightweight and transparent front cover whose upper side is pivotably supported. In this case, even if a game ball is caught between the front cover and the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 that returns from the rotational posture to the reference posture, the front cover will be rotated and displaced accordingly. Therefore, displacement of the distribution plate 903 is allowed.

It should be noted that the angle of the distribution plate 903 that assumes a rotating posture by simply shortening the front and rear width of the front piece 905 or by placing a plurality of game balls on the front piece 905 can be changed by (the force of rotation) By configuring the game ball placed on the front piece 905 to be larger than the angle at which it falls onto the special guide section 705, the front piece 905 of the distribution board 903 and the glass unit 137 can be It may also be possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the two. Furthermore, in the above embodiments, only one game ball enters the specific area 401 (ball entry opening 403) when the blade member 404 is released, and only one game ball enters the route distribution device 703. Even if the game ball is guided, the configuration may be such that there is a possibility (although very low) that the game ball will be guided to the special guide section 705.

(b) Also, a sorting means (in the above embodiment , the configuration of the rotating body unit 410) and the game ball after being detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to either the 15R ball entry port 731, 7R ball entry port 732, or 3R ball entry port 733. The configuration of the type sorting device 741 is not particularly limited, and can be designed as appropriate.

For example, in the rotating body unit 410 of the above embodiment, a game ball that reaches the front of the rotating body 414 (gate section 435) via the safe passage 427 on the left side, and a game ball that reaches the front of the rotating body 414 via the safe passage 427 on the right side The structure is such that the game balls that reach the front of the ball collide with each other, but for example, a structure is provided in which the balls are guided to the rotating body 414 in order (for example, the route on the left side is directly guided to the rotating body 414). The ball is guided to the front of the rotating body 414, and the right route is finally guided to the front of the rotating body 414 after passing through the left route.The game ball that goes through the right route enters the left route. In order to prevent a large backflow of water from the left side route, a device may be installed at the entrance to the left side route to weaken the momentum (for example, a valve that can be opened and closed freely is installed so that it can be opened by the weight of the game ball). good.

For example, regarding the type sorting device 741, there is an inclined plate that is adjacent to the right side of the starting platform 742 and extends toward the right with a slight downward slope (the front side is inclined forward to the right), and The entrance to the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged at the front of the upstream side of the inclined plate, the entrance to the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged at the front of the downstream side of the inclined plate, and the inclined plate The configuration may be such that the entrance to the 15R guide passage 746 is located on the right side of the 15R guide passage 746.

Note that the probability and percentage of a game ball entering the winning lottery area 407 entering the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball entering detection switch 461) are set as appropriate for each model of pachinko machine. . For example, the number of special pocket parts 416a and non-special pocket parts 416b of the rotary body 414 of the rotary body unit 410 may be increased to eight in total, or the number of special pocket parts 416a and non-special pocket parts 416b may be increased. By changing the ratio to, for example, 2:6, 3:5, etc., the probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body unit 410 will enter the special pocket section 416a may be changed.

Further, the distributing means does not have to rotate, but may be one that reciprocates, and there are no particular limitations on the direction or pattern of the movement. Furthermore, the sorting means does not have to be movable; for example, the special pocket section 416a and the non-special pocket section 416b may be fixedly provided, and furthermore, the distributing means may be provided with the special pocket section 416a and the non-special pocket section 416b fixedly provided. It is also possible to provide a configuration that randomizes the behavior of game balls like nails.

(c) In the above embodiment, among the 3R guidance passage 743, 7R guidance passage 745, and 15R guidance passage 746 of the type lottery area 408, the entrance of the passage where it is expected that a jackpot state more advantageous to the player will occur. Although it is configured to be placed on the downstream side of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408, it is longer than the time it takes for a game ball that enters the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736. Also, the time required for the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is shorter, and furthermore, the time required for the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is shorter. It is sufficient that the configuration is such that the time until the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is shorter than the time until the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. For example, the entrance of a passageway that is more likely to lead to a jackpot situation that is more advantageous to the player may be placed closer to the upstream side in the type lottery area 408. However, it is possible to improve the gameplay by delaying the opportunity to receive a jackpot condition that is more advantageous to the player as late as possible. In particular, when adopting a configuration in which the movement paths of game balls in the type lottery area 408 are divided into multiple stages as in the above embodiment, this effect becomes more remarkable.

(d) In addition, the 7R guidance passage 745 is configured so that the movement distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guidance passage 746, and the 3R guidance passage 743 is configured such that the movement distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 7R guidance passage 745. However, basically, the 7R guidance passage 745 is configured so that it takes a longer time for the game ball to pass than the 15R guidance passage 746, and the 3R guidance passage 743 is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the 7R guidance passage 745. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that it takes a long time. For example, changing the inclination of the 3R guidance passage 743, 7R guidance passage 745, and 15R guidance passage 746, delay means such that the game ball moves forward after going back and forth or around the same place several times, and the game A delay means that temporarily stops the momentum of the ball and takes a relatively long time to guide it to the next location may be installed in the 3R guide path 743 or the like. Incidentally, such a delay means may be installed in both the 3R guidance passage 743 and the 7R guidance passage 745, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the 7R guidance passage 745 will be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the 3R guidance passage 743. Install something that will take no longer than the time required to pass.

Of the game balls that entered the two special pockets 416a of the rotating body 414, the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 earlier than the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detected the following game ball. The game ball is configured to be detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 735 earlier than the preceding game ball is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. 734. In addition, it is also possible to omit the 15R guide passage 746 (configuring the game ball to jump directly into the 15R ball entry opening 731 from the second spanning board 747).

(e) In the above embodiment, the number and contents of jackpot types are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set for each model of pachinko machine. Further, the number and contents of game modes such as the normal mode and the time saving mode are not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is shortened, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 that teaches the result of the ball entry assist lottery is shortened, and , the second variable winning device 33b is configured to be open for a long time, but instead of or in addition to this, the probability of winning a small win in a win/fail lottery is increased, or the probability of winning a ball entry assist lottery is increased. The configuration may be such that the probability is increased. In addition, for example, as a game mode, not only the opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently (high ball winning state), but also the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device You may set a variable probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot or small win is increased in a lottery based on the number of balls that enter 33b, or a player may win a jackpot or a small win in a lottery even though the ball is not in a high-ball entry state. You may also set a probability mode that increases the probability of Note that the lottery may be configured so that no jackpot is won.

(f) In the embodiment described above, both the route distribution device 703 and the type distribution device 741 are provided in the specific area 401, but it is also possible to omit either one. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the central winning unit 37 determines whether or not to grant a jackpot state based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the ball (the destination of the ball that enters the ball), and also determines the type of the jackpot state. However, it is not particularly limited to this configuration.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 enters any of the 15R ball entry port 731, 7R ball entry port 732, and 3R ball entry port 733. The type of jackpot is determined in an analog manner depending on whether the ball is played or not, but the type sorting device 741 is omitted and when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the value of the corresponding random number counter is acquired and acquired. The jackpot type may be determined by a lottery to determine which jackpot type the value of the random number counter corresponds to. Further, for example, when a small win is won in a winning lottery conducted based on the entry of game balls into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the central winning unit 37 is opened in response to the small win. It also determines the type of jackpot that will be awarded when a game ball enters the special pocket section 416a and the safe passage 427 (detected by the special entry ball detection switch 461). It may be configured as follows. Even when adopting these configurations, a route distribution device 703 is provided that can guide all of the plurality of game balls to the special passage 702 when simultaneously sorting the plurality of game balls that have entered the specific area 401. As a result, when a relatively rare phenomenon occurs in which game balls enter the specific area 401 at almost the same time, and intuitively, a phenomenon that seems to be likely to occur in a jackpot state occurs, in reality, You can increase your expectation of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the route distribution device 703 provides a jackpot state when the game ball enters, and a safe passage 427 where a prescribed number of prize balls are provided, and a safe path 427 where the game ball enters. Therefore, although the prescribed number of prize balls are awarded, the game ball is guided to either the out passage 428 where the jackpot state is not awarded (it becomes a miss), but this is not limited to such a configuration. It's not something you can do. For example, in a configuration in which the type sorting device 741 is omitted, a lottery determines whether or not a jackpot state will occur when a game ball enters (the game ball is detected), and a type lottery determines the type of the jackpot state. A jackpot state is generated by the first starting ball entering means (first starting ball entering detection means) as the first ball entering means in which the game ball enters (the game ball is detected). a second starting ball entering means (second starting ball entering means) as a second ball entering means (second starting ball entering means) in which a winning/failure lottery and a type lottery determining the type of jackpot state are performed, and the first starting ball entering means Rather than sorting out the types of jackpot states that can be awarded if a jackpot state is won in a lottery conducted based on the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, In a configuration in which the type of jackpot state that can be awarded when a jackpot state is won in the lottery conducted based on the winning lottery is more advantageous for the advantageous person, the route allocating device 703 is configured to Or guide the game ball to either of the second starting ball entering means (in the case of one ball, guide it to the first starting ball entering means, and in the case of two balls (multiple balls in the above example (a-1)). may be configured such that the ball is guided to the second starting ball entry means).

Furthermore, for example, a first ball entering means (first ball entering detection means) that awards m game balls when a game ball enters (the game ball is detected); The route sorting device 703 includes a second ball entering means (second ball entering detecting means) which is provided with n game balls that are larger than m by detecting game balls. Guide the game ball to either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means (in the case of one ball, guide it to the first ball entering means, and guide the game ball to the first ball entering means, and guide the game ball to either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means; In some cases, the ball may be guided to the second ball entering means).

(f-2) Also, for example, if a plurality of game balls do not enter the specific area 401 at almost the same time as in the above embodiment, the possibility of being guided to the special passage 702 is (very) low. The sorting device 703 is omitted, and instead, even if game balls enter a specific area 401 one by one, there is a possibility that the game balls will be guided to the special passage 702. (which may or may not be movable) may be provided. In addition, for example, the special passage 702 may be omitted (the movement path of the game ball may be configured so that there is no advantage or disadvantage in entering the safe passage 427), or the game ball that enters the specific area 401 may rotate. The travel route up to the body 414 may be configured to be a single road, and the route distribution device 703 may be omitted.

(f-3) For example, if the central winning unit 37 is configured as a second variable winning device and a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the jackpot state The blade member 404 may be configured to be opened after a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the central winning unit 37 has the role of determining the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state, specifically, for example, the role of granting either the time saving mode or the variable probability mode after the end of the jackpot state. (1: The type lottery area 408 in the above embodiment is omitted, and the rotating body unit 410 determines whether or not to apply the variable probability mode. It is also possible to configure the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 to detect the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 before applying the probability variable mode upon detection. The route distribution area 406 is omitted, and the type distribution device 741 determines whether or not to give the variable probability mode (in the above embodiment, the variable probability mode is assigned by being detected by the switch configured as the 15R ball entry detection switch 734). If the other switches 745 and 746, which are set so that the time saving mode is applied by detection, have been detected before the application, the time reduction mode may be invalidated).

Furthermore, the first start-up winning device 33a without the opening/closing member 33c is arranged below or on the left side of the central winning unit 37, and the second starting winning device 33b having the opening/closing member 33c is placed in the gaming area on the left side of the central winning unit 37. The through gate 34 is placed in the right game area (right game area), and the through gate 34 is placed only in the right game area. If not, the configuration may be such that it is impossible for the ball to enter the second starting winning device 33b.

In addition, the jackpot state that is awarded when a winner is won in the winning lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning device 33b is based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a. The player is configured to have a higher possibility of becoming a jackpot state advantageous to the player or selecting an advantageous jackpot state than the jackpot state that would be awarded if he won in a winning/failure lottery conducted based on the above. It's okay. For example, if a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the end condition of a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state is that the central winning unit 37 is opened twice for 1 second. Or, if the upper limit is set to 8 balls and a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the second starting winning device 33b, the conditions for ending a predetermined jackpot round in a jackpot state are: The center winning unit 37 may be configured to open once for 30 seconds or to set a maximum of 8 balls. In this case, in a predetermined jackpot round in a jackpot state based on balls entering the second starting winning device 33b, the number of game balls entering the central winning unit 37 increases, so that the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b increases. Jackpot situations based on balls are more advantageous.

(g) In the above embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 operate in synchronization, that is, when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, Although the other is also configured to be in the closed position, it may be configured such that only one of them operates independently. In other words, when a small win is won in a win/fail lottery, there is a pattern in which only the left side of the pair of left and right blade members 404 is in the open position, a pattern in which only the right side is in the open position, and a pattern in which both are in the open position. It may also be configured such that there are different patterns. Furthermore, as a pattern in which both are in the open position, a pattern in which both are opened and closed at the same timing, a pattern in which the left side is earlier, and a pattern in which the right side is earlier may be set. In addition, it may be configured to be able to teach which side of the blade member 404 is to be opened using a liquid crystal display, audio, lighting of a light emitting device, etc. (there may be a teaching state and a non-teaching state). .

Further, in the above embodiment, the specific area 401 is changed in state by the blade member 404 between a state in which the ball can enter the specific area 401 and a state in which it is not possible to enter the specific area 401, but for example, the blade member 404 may be omitted, or In addition to the ball entrance opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404, there is always a possibility that the ball will enter the specific area 401, such as by providing an opening that allows the ball to enter the specific area 401. It may be configured as follows.

(h) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the first ball that has entered the first ball entry opening 403a on the left side of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 in the central winning unit 37 is guided to the route distribution device 703. Although the introduction passage 718a is configured to have the same length as the second introduction passage 718b that guides game balls that have entered the second ball entry opening 403b on the right side to the route sorting device 703, they are different. It may be configured as follows. In addition, a movable passage may be provided in one or both of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b to lengthen or shorten the introduction passages 718a, 718b (or to vary the moving speed of the game ball). . When adopting these configurations, even if the game balls do not enter the first ball entry opening 403a and the second ball entry opening 403b at the same time, the first wing 714 and the second wing part 714 of the route distribution device 703 There is a possibility that two game balls fall to the wing portion 715 at the same time.

In the above embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are folded back and forth, making it difficult to visually recognize the game balls moving through the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. At least a portion near the exit may be configured to extend in the left-right direction and be visible from the front (divided by a transparent front panel or opened to the front).

Further, the route sorting device 703 of the above embodiment may be employed, and the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be configured to merge, as in the above embodiment (a-1). Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, the game balls are configured to be able to fall simultaneously onto the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703 (the width of the exit of the introduction passage after merging is wide, etc.). In addition, near the exit of the introduction passage after merging, the game balls may move slowly, roll from side to side, and then fall, making it easier for players to recognize the game balls. . When adopting such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls enter one of the first ball entry openings 403a or the second ball entry opening 403b in succession, There is a possibility that the game balls fall to the first wing section 714 and the second wing section 715 of the route distribution device 703 at the same time. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area 401 from both the first ball entry opening 403a and the second ball entry opening 403b and aim at the launch position of the game ball, it may enter from either one. Since all you have to do is aim at the launch position of the game ball so that it is easy to hit, the operability and gameplay should be simple (for example, games that do not require the ball to hit both at the same time) even a person can do it without any loss). Note that the ball entry opening 403 may be provided at one location.

Furthermore, a stopping means is provided in the introduction passage 718, and for example, a game ball that enters the specific area 404 (ball entry opening 403) is temporarily stopped in the stopping means while the left and right wing members 404 are opened once. After being guided to the route distribution device 703, the configuration may be such that the route distribution device 703 guides the route distribution device 703 all at once. In this case, even if the timing of the ball entering the specific area 404 (ball entrance opening 403) is slightly different, if the game ball can be made to enter the specific area 404 between when the blade member 404 opens and when it closes. , the timing of dropping to the route distribution device 703 can be adjusted.

The stopping means may be configured to switch between an open state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is permitted and a closed state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is restricted, or may be configured to switch over a certain period of time between an open state in which movement to the route distribution device 703 is permitted, or a structure in which it is constantly operating but does not allow movement to the route distribution device 703. In addition to displacing between an open position in which movement to the device 703 is permitted and a closed position in which movement is restricted, the movement of the stop means is relatively slow, and until the stop means switches from the closed position to the open position. It may be configured such that the game ball that enters the specific area 404 (ball entry opening 403) while the blade member 404 is open can be stopped in the stopping means.

(i) In the above embodiment, in the advance production process, only when the value of the ball entering counter is 0 and the value of the ball jamming counter is 1, the setting process of the 3R advance opening command or the 7R advance opening command is performed. Although the configuration is configured to perform opening command setting processing, if the value of the ball entry counter is 0, the opening command setting processing may be performed regardless of the value of the ball jamming counter. However, if the value of the ball jam counter is other than 0, the opening command setting process may be performed (if it is 0, for example, error processing is performed).

In other words, when the value of the ball clogging counter is 2 or more, another game ball is placed in the 3R guidance path 743 or 7R guidance path before the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection switch 754. 745 already exists. In the above embodiment, if this preceding game ball exists, the jackpot state will start without waiting for that long, so a configuration is adopted in which the derivation of the preceding opening performance is refrained from. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, for example, the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754 is confirmed, but at that time there is already a game ball moving in (near the exit of) the 3R guidance path 743. Therefore, even if a preliminary opening performance for a 7-round jackpot is performed based on the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754, a situation where a 3-round jackpot is actually awarded instead of a 7-round jackpot is avoided. can do.

However, if the configuration is such that the passage time of the game ball in the 3R guidance path 743 or the 7R guidance path 745 is longer, the reaction regarding the occurrence of the jackpot will still be derived after the value of the ball entry counter reaches 0. There is a possibility that the time lag until the In such a case, such concerns can be suppressed by deriving the advance opening performance even if the value of the ball jamming counter is not 1, as described above.

Furthermore, even when such a configuration is adopted, since the value of the ball entry counter is 0, there is no possibility that the subsequent game ball will cause a more advantageous jackpot state, and for example, a preliminary opening for a 3-round jackpot. Although the performance was derived, before the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 was detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, another game ball was detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, and the 15R ball entry detection switch 736 detected another game ball. It is possible to avoid situations such as the occurrence of a round jackpot situation.

In addition, after step S7705 in FIG. 32, a process is added to set on the 3R passing flag indicating that the game ball is passing through the 3R guide path 743, and after step S7711, the game ball is set to turn on the 3R passing flag indicating that the game ball is passing through the 7R guide path 745. A process is added to set on the 7R passing flag, which indicates that the vehicle is passing through. Furthermore, in step S7703, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball clogging counter, it is determined whether or not the 7R passing flag is turned on, and if the determination is affirmative, the game that is passing through the 7R guidance passage 745 is determined. Since the ball will be detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 first, set the advance opening command for the 7th round jackpot (if the determination is negative, set the advance opening command for the 3rd round jackpot). ). In addition, in step S7709, instead of the process of determining the value of the ball jam counter, it is determined whether or not the 3R passing flag is turned on, and if the determination is affirmative, the 7th round jackpot and the 3rd round jackpot are determined. It may be configured such that a shared advance opening command is set, or no advance opening command is set (if a negative determination is made, a precedence opening command for a 7-round jackpot is set). Further, for example, the advance opening effect may be shared (in the same manner) by the 7th round jackpot and the 3rd round jackpot. When these configurations are adopted, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the mode of the advance opening presentation and the actual type of jackpot. It is assumed that the 3R passing flag and the 7R passing flag are turned off at the start or end of the jackpot state.

(j) In the remaining ball monitoring process of the above embodiment, an error notification process that is performed when the value of the monitoring timer reaches 0 in a state where the value of the incoming ball counter is determined to be other than 0, and the ball jamming counter The manner (content) of error notification may be configured to be different from the error notification processing performed when the value of the monitoring timer reaches 0 in a state where the value of is determined to be other than 0. That is, depending on the ball entry counter, among the route distribution area 406, win/fail lottery area 407, and type lottery area 408, the areas upstream of the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734 are It is possible to understand that game balls are clogged in the area. Further, depending on the ball jam counter, the area downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream of the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 in the type lottery area 408, or downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754, In addition, it is possible to know that game balls are clogged in the area upstream of the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, that is, in the 3R guidance passage 743 or the 7R guidance passage 745. Therefore, by varying the error notification, it is possible to more specifically indicate where in the specific area 401 the ball is clogging.

(k) In the above embodiment, when a preliminary opening performance is performed, a jackpot state in which the opening performance is shortened is performed, but a jackpot state in which the opening performance is omitted is configured to be performed. You may.

(l) In the above embodiment, a detection switch is installed in the special guide section 705 or the special passage 702, and when a game ball is detected, a sound effect or a sound effect is provided to notify that the game ball is passing through the special route. It may be configured to generate a lamp lighting effect or the like.

(m) In the above embodiment, a translucent cover 756 is provided to cover the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745, but the design of the cover 756 can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible to omit the covering cover 756. Further, for example, an LED is provided that emits light toward the back side of the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c, respectively, and the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, or 15R ball entry detection switch is installed. The configuration may be such that when detection by 734 is performed, the corresponding LED is turned on. Furthermore, it may be configured to blink when a promotion is being accepted.

(n) In the above embodiment, the probability of winning the winning lottery and the variable display time are the same regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. When a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a and when a game ball enters the second start-up winning device 33b, the distribution of jackpots and small wins in the win/fail lottery, and the distribution of winnings in each lottery. It is also possible to configure the contents of the benefits to be different. For example, a first special display device that displays a variable display for teaching the result of a winning/fail lottery that is performed based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, and a first special display device that displays a variable display based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. A second special display device is provided in which a variable display is displayed to show the result of the winning lottery to be held, and when a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, , at a ratio of 9/10, the blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second, and at a ratio of 1/10, the blade member 404 is opened twice for 1 second, and the ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. If you win a small win in the lottery based on the above, at a rate of 1/10 the blade member 404 will be opened only once for 1 second, and at a rate of 9/10 the blade member 404 will be opened 2 times for 1 second. It may be configured so that it can be opened once.

(o) In the above embodiment, it is possible to suspend up to a total of four variable displays on the special display device 43 that tell the results of the lottery based on the balls entering the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. However, the number of reservations is not particularly limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which up to four (total eight) variable displays can be suspended in correspondence to each ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. When adopting this configuration, it may be configured such that the number of pending variable displays based on balls entering each starting winning device 33a, 33b can be separately grasped. In addition, when adopting this configuration, for example, a variable display based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is given priority over a changing display based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a variable display corresponding to the order in which the balls enter the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is executed.

Incidentally, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display of the lottery results is not suspended. Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the number of reservations in the variable display for teaching the result of the entry assist lottery, and it may be configured such that less than four or five or more can be reserved, or the number of reservations in the variable display for teaching the result of the entrance assist lottery A configuration may also be adopted in which variable display is not suspended.

(p) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, two starting ball entry means (the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b) are provided, but it may be one, or three or more may be provided. . Further, the arrangement of the starting ball entry means is not particularly limited either. In the above embodiment, a "big hit" (direct hit jackpot) may be won in a lottery conducted based on the ball entering the starting winning device 33a, 33b, but The lottery based on the above may be configured so that a "big win" award is not determined (so that it is divided into a "small win" or a "miss"). Furthermore, when a ball enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b, the blade member 404 may be configured to be opened without fail (so that a "small hit" is always made and there is no dislodgement). Further, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 may be opened a plurality of times (for example, twice) for each "small win".

(q) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, while omitting the variable winning device 32 (big winning hole), based on the ball entering the special winning hole 442 and the non-special winning hole 443 (detection of the special ball entering detection switch 461 and the non-special ball entering detection switch 462), Assuming that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g. eight) are paid out in the specific area 401 until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is released. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which the game state is set as a jackpot state during a predetermined round (for example, 3, 8, or 16 rounds) in which one round is defined as the time until a game ball enters the ball. In this case, the central winning unit 37 also functions as the variable winning device 32. In addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as arrangement ball machines and similar mahjong ball machines.

(r) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration detection means for detecting vibrations of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken (hit) when the power is turned on. When the vibration is detected by the vibration detection means, and the detection is performed, the error processing (error notification in the pachinko machine 10, temporary suspension of the game (normal processing, etc.), external processing of the hall computer, etc.) The configuration is such that error information is output to

In addition, when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408, such as when the special ball entry detection switch 461 (type entry detection means) detects, the decorative symbol display device 42 (display means) , ``Please do not shake the table. If vibrations are detected, the jackpot may be invalidated.'' Caution displays (basic voice announcements, etc.) that call for caution against vibrating the pachinko machine 10 It is desirable that the guidance is completed between when the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 and when it enters the type lottery area 408). In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from shaking the pachinko machine 10 due to being too enthusiastic about the game (unintentionally or intentionally), and also to prevent the player from shaking the pachinko machine 10 due to the shaking of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent a situation where a change occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the pachinko machine 10 vibrates, which is undesirable for both the player and the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

Furthermore, if the vibration detection level by the vibration detection means is set at multiple levels and a game ball enters the type lottery area 408, such as when the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, the vibration It may be configured such that the detection level is raised (even smaller vibrations can be detected). In addition, error handling is not performed when vibration is detected once, but after a warning is displayed, an error occurs when vibration is detected next time (for example, while a warning is being displayed). The configuration may be such that the processing is performed.

(s) In the above embodiment, instead of determining the occurrence of a jackpot state based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 (for example, the special ball entry detection switch 46 is omitted, or the special ball entry detection switch 46 is The system is configured to determine the occurrence of each type of jackpot state based on the detection of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 3R ball entry detection switch 736. It's okay.

In addition, the central winning unit 37 includes a type entry detection switch (type entry detection means) that is provided separately from the special ball entry detection switch 461 and detects the (immediately previous) game ball guided into the type lottery area 408. There is a back passage counter that counts up based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 and counts down based on the detection of the type entry detection switch, and a back passage counter that is provided near the entrance to the type lottery area 408 and that is set to the value of the back passage counter. It may also be provided with (in this example, two) type entry standby lamps whose lighting is controlled accordingly. In this case, the number of game balls entering the type lottery area 408 can be easily grasped.

Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the passage (back passage) from the rotating body 414 (safe passage 427) to the type lottery area 408 (starting table 742) is made visible to the player in front. It may also be configured. Further, the back passage may be configured such that the game balls flow down one by one so that the order of the game balls is not changed. In addition, in a back passage, etc., an interval adjusting means (a shutter that opens and closes at predetermined intervals, a shutter that opens and closes at predetermined intervals, and a shutter that rotates at regular intervals and moves the game balls one by one to the downstream side) A guideable wind turbine body, etc.) may also be provided. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the behavior of game balls that successively enter the type lottery area 408.

(t) In the above embodiment, special ball entry detection switch 461, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, ball entry count switch 437, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 7345, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, A detection history storage means capable of accumulating and storing detection information (detection history) of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is provided, and the stored contents of the detection history storage means can be derived to the decorative pattern display device 42, etc. It may also be configured. Furthermore, the detection information may be configured to be outputtable to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a hall computer) each time it is detected or at predetermined intervals. In this case, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area 401 is clearly left, it is possible to avoid complications caused by troubles between the player and the game hall regarding where the game ball entered. I can do it.

Particularly, when the time of a real-time clock provided in the pachinko machine 10 for ascertaining the current time and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such effects will be more pronounced. Note that the detection history in the detection history storage means may be configured to be erased after a predetermined period (one day, one week, etc.) or may be configured to be erased by a RAM clear operation. Good (turning the power on or off is not desirable). Further, it may be configured such that the values of the ball entry counter and the ball jamming counter can be derived to the decorative symbol display device 42 and the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

(u) In the central winning unit 37, a stopping means that can stop the game ball moving in the specific area 401 may be provided. Here, an example of an embodiment of the stopping means in the type sorting device 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game balls that consecutively enter the type lottery area 408 is essentially two balls, but in this example, three or more game balls are consecutively entered into the type lottery area 408. It is assumed that the configuration is such that the ball can enter the area 408 (for example, there are four or more pockets 416 of the rotating body 414, and there are three or more special pockets 416a).

As shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), the type sorting device 741 is provided adjacent to the downstream (right side) edge of the starting platform 742, and is tilted slightly downward toward the right side like the starting platform 742. It is provided with a distribution plate 931 that extends. The distribution plate 931 is formed with three circular holes in a plan view arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931 into which game balls can enter, so that one game ball can be inserted into each hole. A 3R stop section 933, a 7R stop section 934, and a 15R stop section 935 are provided.

Below the distribution board 931, game balls that have entered the 3R stop section 933, 7R stop section 934, and 15R stop section 935 are supported, and the game balls are transferred to the 3R stop section 933, 7R stop section 934, and 15R stop section. A retaining rotating body 937 is provided as a retaining means that can be retained at 935. The stationary rotating body 937 has a substantially cylindrical shape, and is provided so that the center line of the cylindrical body is the center axis of rotation, and the center axis of rotation extends in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931.

Further, on the outer circumferential surface of the stationary rotary body 937, ejection recesses 938 are provided which are formed at positions corresponding to the 3R stationary portions 933, 7R stationary portions 934, and 15R stationary portions 935, respectively, and are capable of accommodating game balls. . Further, below the stationary rotating body 937, the respective entrances of a 3R guide passage 743, a 7R guide passage 745, and a 15R guide passage 746 are provided.

As the retention rotating body 937 rotates, a period in which each discharge recess 938 matches each of the 3R retention portions 933, 7R retention portions 934, and 15R retention portions 935 and a period in which they do not occur are repeated. There is. In other words, if the ejection recess 938 does not match the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, and 15R stop 935 (the ejection recess 938 faces downward), the 3R stop 933, 7R stop The game ball that enters the 934 and 15R stop sections 935 will be stopped at the 3R stop section 933, the 7R stop section 934, and the 15R stop section 935. After that, when the retaining rotary body 937 rotates until the discharge recess 938 matches each of the 3R retaining parts 933, 7R retaining parts 934, and 15R retaining parts 935, the 3R retaining parts 933, 7R retaining parts 934, and 15R retaining parts 935 The parked game ball will be accommodated in the corresponding ejection recess 938. Further, as the stationary rotating body 937 rotates, the game balls accommodated in each ejection recess 938 enter the corresponding 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, and 15R guide path 746. In other words, the game ball parked in the 3R stop section 933 enters the 3R guide path 743, and the game ball parked in the 7R stop section 934 enters the 7R guide path 745, and is stopped in the 15R stop section 935. The game ball enters the 15R guidance passage 746.

Further, the stationary rotating body 937 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), and rotates so that the surface facing upward moves forward. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when no game ball enters the type lottery area 408, the stationary rotating body 937 is stopped at the reference posture (reference position) in which the ejection recess 938 faces downward. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 as an arrival detection means, the stepping motor is driven and the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to start rotating. In this example, the stationary rotating body 937 takes 6.5 seconds to displace from the standard position to the receiving position in which the ejection recess 938 faces upward, and from the receiving position to the standard position takes 3 seconds. is configured to do so. In addition, the game balls parked in the 3R stopping part 933, 7R stopping part 934, and 15R stopping part 935 are simultaneously accommodated in each ejection recess 938 of the stopping rotary body 937, and are simultaneously transferred from each ejection recess 938 to the 3R guide path. 743, 7R guide passage 745, and 15R guide passage 746.

Note that the stationary rotary body 937, which has returned to the reference position after one rotation, is stopped at this position. Furthermore, during the jackpot state, the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to rotate at all times (until the end of the ending). In addition, when the jackpot state ends, the remaining balls in the specific area 401 are checked, and if there are no remaining balls, the jackpot state ends, and if there are remaining balls, the ending is extended for a predetermined time, and the ending is extended for a predetermined time. If this is exceeded, an error message will be displayed. In addition, there is a valid state in which the detection of the 3R ball entering detection switch 736, 7R ball entering detection switch 735, and 15R ball entering detection switch 734 is valid, and an invalid state in which the detection is disabled. When the detection switches 735 and 15R ball entry detection switch 734 are detected, the state is switched to the invalid state, and when there are no remaining balls in the specific area 401 at the end of the jackpot state, the state is switched to the valid state.

Incidentally, the time from when the game ball accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 enters the safe passage 427 until it reaches the type lottery area 408 is about 2 seconds. In this embodiment, a state in which game balls are accommodated in the ejection recess 938 of the stationary rotating body 937 and the stationary rotating body 937 is moving corresponds to a guiding state, and other states correspond to a stationary state.

In addition, the 7R ball entry detection after the game ball enters the 7R guidance path 745 is longer than the 15R arrival time from when the game ball enters the 15R guidance path 746 until it is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734. It is configured so that the time it takes to reach 7R until it is detected by the switch 735 is longer (so that the moving distance is longer), and the time it takes for the game ball to reach 3R after it enters the 3R guidance path 743 is longer than the time it takes to reach 7R. The configuration is such that the time it takes for the ball to reach 3R until it is detected by the ball entry detection switch 736 is longer (the distance traveled is longer). Therefore, when a game ball is parked at the 15R stop section 935, the jackpot state of "15R jackpot" will not occur regardless of whether the game ball is parked at the 3R stop section 933 or the 7R stop section 934. This will occur. In addition, if a game ball is parked at the 7R stop section 934 and no game ball is parked at the 15R stop section 935, regardless of whether or not a game ball is parked at the 3R stop section 933, the "7R jackpot" ” jackpot situation has started to occur. Furthermore, when a game ball is parked at the 3R stop section 933 and no game balls are parked at the 7R stop section 934 or the 15R stop section 935, a jackpot state of "3R jackpot" occurs. . Similarly to the above embodiment, in a jackpot state or a state in which the occurrence of a jackpot state is determined, the game ball is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 15R ball entry detection switch 734. Even if the jackpot is detected, the jackpot state detection corresponding to the detection is not given.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball that has entered and stopped at a 3R stop section 933, a 7R stop section 934, or a 15R stop section 935 is detected at a position between the distribution board 931 and the stop rotating body 937. A 3R standby detection switch 941, a 7R standby detection switch 942, and a 15R standby detection switch 943 are provided. Furthermore, on the vertical wall surface behind the distribution board 931, 3R standby lamps 944 and 7R standby lamps 945 as entrance display sections are provided, corresponding to the rear positions of the 3R stop sections 933, 7R stop sections 934, and 15R stop sections 935. , 15R standby lamp 946 is provided.

In this example, when the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected, the 3R standby lamp 944 lights up, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected, the 7R standby lamp 945 lights up, When the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected, the 15R standby lamp 946 is turned on, and when a predetermined jackpot condition occurs, the various standby lamps 944, 945, and 946 are turned off. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 42, a display of "Jackpot type lottery in progress" is derived based on the detection information of the special ball entry detection switch 461, and when the detection of the 15R standby detection switch 943 is performed, the display of "15 rounds" is derived. Congratulations on the jackpot" display is derived, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is not detected, the display "7 round jackpot or more confirmed" is derived. When the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected and the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943 are not detected, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected. However, the display of ``Jackpot type lottery'' continues to be displayed as is. The standby teaching means (early teaching means) has a function of lighting the standby lamps 944, 945, 946 or deriving the display of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the detection information of the standby detection switches 941, 942, 943. ).

In addition, in this embodiment, on the distribution board 931, the 3R stop section 933, the 7R stop section 934, and the 15R stop section 935 are arranged in a row from the upstream side, and basically, the game balls are stopped at the 3R stop section 933. If a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 (start stand 742) in a state where it is not set, the game ball enters the 3R stop section 933 and is stopped at the 3R stop section 933. There is.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is parked in the 3R stop section 933, the game ball will climb over the game ball parked in the 3R stop section 933 ( The ball reaches the 7R stop section 934 (using the ball as a stepping stone), enters the 7R stop section 934, and is stopped.

In addition, if a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is parked at the 3R stop section 933 and the 7R stop section 934, the game ball enters the 3R stop section 933 and the 7R stop section 934. The ball climbs over the game balls parked at (by using as a stepping stone) to reach the 15R stop section 935, enters the 15R stop section 935, and is stopped.

Also, adjacent to the downstream edge of the distribution board 931, game balls that have not entered any of the 3R stop section 933, 7R stop section 934, and 15R stop section 935 are accepted, and the pachinko machine 10 is A discharge port 948 is provided for discharging to the outside. In addition, in order to ascertain the presence or absence of game balls (remaining balls) in the specific area 401, a discharge detection switch 949 is provided that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port 948, and when detection is performed, a ball entry counter is activated. The value of is subtracted.

In this example, the 3R stop part 933 is the first stop part for the 7R stop part 934 and the 15R stop part 935, and the 7R stop part 934 is the second stop part for the 3R stop part 933, and The 15R stop part 935 is the first stop part for the stop part 935, and the 15R stop part 935 is the second stop part for the 3R stop part 933 and the 7R stop part 934. Further, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is a first standby detection means for the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943, and the 7R standby detection switch 942 is a second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941. , and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is a second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941 and the 7R standby detection switch 942. In addition, in this embodiment, the standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943 constitute early detection means, and the 3R stop section 933, the 7R stop section 934, the 15R stop section 935, the 3R guide path 743, and the 7R guide path. 745 and the 15R guide path 746 constitute a ball entry route (a first ball entry route and a second ball entry route).

As described above, in this embodiment, the type sorting device 741 of the type lottery area 408 is provided with the 3R stopping section 933, the 7R stopping section 934, and the 15R stopping section 935 for stopping the game balls, and the game balls are Depending on where the jackpot is stopped, it is possible to know which jackpot type will be awarded. In other words, it is certain that the game ball parked at the 3R stop section 933 will be detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stop section 934 will be detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735. It has been determined that the game ball that has been detected and has been parked in the 15R stopping portion 935 will be detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 someday. Furthermore, for example, the game balls parked at the 3R stop section 933, 7R stop section 934, and 15R stop section 935 enter the 3R guide passage 743, 7R guide passage 745, and 15R guide passage 746 all at once. In this case, among the 15R ball entering detection switch 734, 7R ball entering detection switch 735, and 3R ball entering detection switch 736, the more advantageous the detection for the player is, the earlier the game ball is detected. There is. As a result, for example, if game balls are parked in all of the 3R stopping part 933, 7R stopping part 934, and 15R stopping part 935, the game ball parked in the 15R stopping part 935 will be switched to the 15R ball entering detection switch. 734 is detected, a "15R jackpot" is generated.

For this reason, for example, although a game ball parked in the 15R stop section 935 is guided to the 15R guide path 746, a game ball parked in the 3R stop section 933 or 7R stop section 934 is guided to the 3R guide path 743 or the 7R guide path 746. To avoid the occurrence of an unsatisfactory phenomenon such as the possibility that the "15R jackpot" will not occur (it will become a "3R jackpot" or "7R jackpot") because the player is guided to the guidance path 745. I can do it. Therefore, easy-to-understand gameplay is ensured by making the game ball stop in the 7R stop part 934 rather than in the 3R stop part 933, and further in the 15R stop part 935 rather than in the 7R stop part 934. This allows you to clearly identify the exciting points (highlights, areas to focus on).

Furthermore, the more game balls enter the type lottery area 408, the easier it is to park the game balls in the parking sections 934 and 935, which are more advantageous for the player, and the more the game balls are parked in the 3R parking section 933. Since there is no need to be afraid of this, allowing a large number of game balls to enter the type lottery area 408, or more fundamentally, the specific area 401, can be associated with being advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to completely eliminate the situation where people have a negative impression about letting a game ball enter the specific area 401, and it is possible to more reliably improve the gameplay by letting the game ball enter the specific area 401 as much as possible. can be taken as a thing.

In addition, each stop portion 933, 934, 935 is formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating one game ball each. For this reason, the game balls stopped at the stopping parts 933, 934, 935 can be more securely held (positioned) in the stopping parts 933, 934, 935. Therefore, in a state where the game balls are parked in the type sorting device 741, it is possible to more accurately determine which guide path 743, 745, 746 the parked game balls should be guided to. becomes possible. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the game balls do not stay there but flow into the guide passages 743, 745, 746, it is easier to recognize that the game balls are guided to the guide passages 743, 745, 746. I can do it. Furthermore, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide path 746, and the player can enjoy the state in which the occurrence of the "15R jackpot" is confirmed, and can more carefully see how the game ball is guided to the 15R guide path 746. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a gaming experience in which the game ball is parked in the type sorting device 741 (the respective stopping sections 933, 934, 935).

Further, in this embodiment, standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943 capable of detecting game balls parked in each of the parking sections 933, 934, and 935 are provided. Therefore, when the game ball is stopped in the stopping parts 933, 934, and 935, if the stopping state is released, the game ball is guided to the 15R guidance path 746 ("15R jackpot"). It is possible to teach that, currently, the game ball is only guided to the 3R guiding path 743 (a "3R jackpot" occurs). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance in the parked state in which the game balls are parked in the type sorting device 741, and to improve the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the 3R stop section 933, the 7R stop section 934, and the 15R stop section 935 are arranged in this order from the upstream side in the type lottery area 408, and basically, game balls are stopped at the 3R stop section 933. By keeping the game ball in this state, the game ball can reach and stop at the 7R stop part 934. By keeping the game ball in the 3R stop part 933 and the 7R stop part 934, the game ball can be stopped. The vehicle is configured such that it can reach the 15R stopping portion 935 and stop there. Therefore, by letting a plurality of game balls reach the type lottery area 408, the player can enjoy watching the game balls move step by step in a way that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to perceive the fact that the game balls are stopped at the 3R stop section 933 or the 7R stop section 934 as a good impression.

In addition, the stationary rotating body 937 of this embodiment does not continue to move all the time, but is basically stopped in a reference posture with the ejection recess 938 facing downward, so that the special ball entry detection switch 461 cannot detect it. Starts the operation if done. Then, when it rotates once and returns to the standard posture, it stops. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball that has reached the type sorting device 741 passes through the type sorting device 741 without being stopped, such as when the stationary rotating body 937 continues to operate. can. Therefore, the real pleasure of enjoying how the game balls stay in the type sorting device 741 can be enjoyed more reliably.

In this example, if a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while no game ball is parked in the 3R stopping part 933, the game ball enters the 3R stopping part 933 and the game ball enters the 3R stopping part 933. If a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is stopped at the stop section 933, the game ball stops at the 3R stop section 933. When the game ball reaches the 7R stop section 934 by climbing over the ball (using it as a stepping stone), enters and stops at the 7R stop section 934, and the game ball is stopped at the 3R stop section 933 and the 7R stop section 934, the type When a game ball enters the lottery area 408, the game ball climbs over the game balls parked at the 3R stop section 933 and the 7R stop section 934 (using it as a stepping stone) and reaches the 15R stop section 935. , the game ball enters and stops at the 15R stop section 935, but even if the game ball is not stopped at the 3R stop section 933, the game ball reaches the 7R stop section 934 or the 15R stop section 935. The configuration may also be such that the ball enters the field and is stopped. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the game ball reaches the 7R stop part 934 or the 15R stop part 935 more easily when the game ball is stopped in the 3R stop part 933 than when the game ball is not stopped in the 3R stop part 933. Since it is easy to do so, it is possible to secure the gameplay in which the player aims to make many game balls enter the specific area 401.

(v) Next, a modification of the type sorting device 741 shown in FIG. 46 will be described. Similar to the type sorting device 741 of FIG. 45, the type sorting device 741 of this embodiment is provided with a sorting plate 951 adjacent to the starting platform 742. However, the jackpot types awarded based on the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461 in this example embodiment are only "15 round jackpot" and "8 round jackpot", and correspondingly, the distribution board 951 has , an upper stop part 952 and a lower stop part 953 are provided. In addition, also in this embodiment, the upper stopping part 952 is on the upstream side, and basically by stopping the game ball in the upper stopping part 952, the game ball can reach the lower stopping part 953. However, the game ball may be configured to be able to reach the lower stop portion 953 even if the game ball is not stopped at the upper stop portion 952. However, the configuration is such that even if only one game ball enters the type lottery area 408, some jackpot type is always determined.

Below the sorting board 951, a stopping shutter 954 is provided as a stopping means for stopping the game balls that have entered the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953 at the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953. There is. The stationary shutter 954 extends horizontally and is configured to be movable back and forth and horizontally between a protruding position protruding below the distribution plate 951 and an open position recessing into the front surface of the game board 30. There is. When the stop shutter 954 is set to the protruding position, the type sorting device 741 that can stop the game balls at the upper stop part 952 and the lower stop part 953 is put into the stop state, and the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position. In this case, the type sorting device 741 enters a guiding state in which the game balls parked in the upper stopping section 952 and the lower stopping section 953 are guided to the downstream side (distributing device 954 described later). The stationary shutter 954 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the detection of the special ball entry detection switch 461, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after being set to the open position. state (always open position).

A distributor 954 (distributor) is provided below the stationary shutter 954. The sorter 954 has the same configuration as the route sorter 703 of the above embodiment, and includes a shaft portion 957 that is pivotally supported by a shaft pin 956, and a first wing portion 958 that projects leftward from the shaft portion 957. and a second wing portion 959 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 957, and has a bilaterally symmetrical shape. The first guide surface 958a, which is the upper surface of the first wing section 958, is inclined downward toward the left side, and the second guide surface 959a, which is the upper surface of the second wing section 959, is inclined downward toward the right side. Although the distributor 954 is rotatably supported, when no external force is applied, the distributor 954 assumes a reference posture in which the first wing section 958 and the second wing section 959 extend from the shaft section 957 to the left and right.

Further, a first wing section 958 (first guide surface 958a) is arranged directly below the upper stop section 952, and a second wing section 959 (second guide surface 959a) is arranged immediately below the lower stop section 953. has been done. In this embodiment, when game balls are parked in both the upper stop part 952 and the lower stop part 953, these game balls are parked in the first wing part 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing part 959 ( They will simultaneously fall to (almost) even left and right positions centering on the shaft portion 957 of the second guide surface 959a). In this way, when the game balls fall simultaneously onto the first wing section 958 and the second wing section 959, the distributor 954 does not substantially rotate.

Further, a 15R guide passage 960 is provided on the left side of the first wing section 958 (first guide surface 958a) and on the right side of the second wing section 959 (second guide surface 959a). Furthermore, an 8R guide passage 961 is provided below the distributor 954. In addition, each 15R guide path 960 is provided with a 15R ball entry detection switch 962 that detects a game ball guided to the 15R guide path 960. Further, an 8R ball entry detection switch 963 is provided to detect a game ball guided to the 8R guide path 961.

When the parking shutter 954 is set to the open position from the state where the game balls are parked in one of the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953, the weight of the playing balls rotates the sorter 954, The game ball is guided to the 8R guidance passage 961. On the other hand, when the game balls are parked in both the upper stop part 952 and the lower stop part 953 and the stop shutter 954 is set to the open position, these game balls are stopped in the first wing part 958 (the first wing part 958). It is guided to the 15R guide passage 960 by the guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a).

Further, an upper early detection switch 964 that detects a game ball parked in the upper stop portion 952 and a lower early detection switch 965 that detects a game ball parked in the lower stop portion 953 are provided. In this example, when both the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 are detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a message indicating that there is a high chance of winning the "15R jackpot", and In a state where one of the switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and there is no possibility that the other will be detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a message indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the "8R jackpot". , and in a state where one of the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected, and there is a possibility that the other will be detected, a "15R jackpot" is won on the decorative pattern display device 42. A display indicating that there is a possibility (promotion acceptance display) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first wing part 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing part 959 (second guide surface 959a) when guiding the game ball to the 15R guide path 960, and the 15R guide The passage 960 constitutes a second ball entry route (in some cases, a second guiding passage), and the first wing part 958 (first guiding surface 958a) or the second ball entering route when guiding the game ball to the 8R guiding passage 961 The wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) and the 8R guide path 961 constitute a first ball entry route (in some cases, a first guide path). In addition, in a state where the game ball is parked in only one of the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953, the upper stopping part 952 or the lower stopping part 953 corresponds to the first stopping part, and the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953 correspond to the first stopping part. In a state in which game balls are parked in both of the lower stopping parts 953, the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953 correspond to the second stopping part. Incidentally, in this embodiment, if the game ball is not stopped in the upper stop part 952, the game ball is not stopped in the lower stop part 953, so the upper stop part 952 is substantially the first stop part. , the lower stop portion 953 is the second stop portion.

As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot type is configured to differ depending on whether the game ball is stopped at both of the upper stopping section 952 and the lower stopping section 953, or whether it is stopped at only one of them. There is. Also in this configuration, effects such as allowing the player to enjoy the state in which the game balls are held in the type sorting device 741 can be achieved. In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls are parked in both of the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953, both game balls are guided to the 15R guiding passage 960, while being guided to the 8R guiding passage 961. Since it is configured so that it is not guided, the game ball is stopped at both the upper stopping part 952 and the lower stopping part 953, and a jackpot state of "15R jackpot" which is more advantageous for the player is given. It is possible to more reliably associate these with each other.

(w) Next, a modification of the type sorting device 741 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b) will be described. The type sorting device 741 of this embodiment is provided with a substantially disc-shaped croon 971 through which a game ball entering the type lottery area 408 and passing the starting board 742 is guided. The croon 971 has an outer peripheral part 972 where the game ball passing through the starting platform 742 is first guided and where the game ball can revolve according to its momentum, and an outer peripheral part 972 located on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral part 972. The inner circumferential portion 973 includes a plurality of stop portions 974 arranged in an annular shape.

In this example, the win/fail lottery area 407 is omitted, and the game ball that enters the specific area 401 always enters the type lottery area 408, and the jackpot is determined by the behavior of the game ball (winning place) in the type lottery area 408. It is configured such that the granting of the state and the type of jackpot to be granted are determined. In other words, there is a possibility that three or more game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in quick succession. Furthermore, the game ball is configured to reach the type lottery area 408 sooner when the game ball is guided to the special passage 702 than when the game ball is guided to the normal passage 701 by the route distribution device 703. It may also be assumed that it has been done.

A stopping shutter 954 is provided below the croon 971 as a stopping means for stopping the game ball that has entered the stopping part 974 in the stopping part 974. The stationary shutter 975 extends horizontally and is configured to be movable back and forth and horizontally between a protruding position in which it protrudes below the crown 971 and an open position in which it is recessed into the front surface of the game board 30. . When the stopping shutter 975 is set to the protruding position, the type sorting device 741 that can stop the game balls at the stopping part 974 is put into the stopping state, and when the stopping shutter 975 is set to the open position, the stopping part The type sorting device 741 is brought into a guiding state in which the game balls parked at the ball 974 are guided to the downstream side (sorter 976 to be described later). The stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball, and is set to the protruding position, for example, 0.4 seconds after being set to the open position. state (always open position).

A distributor 976 (distributor) is provided below the stationary shutter 975. The distributor 976 is configured to be rotatable so that its rotational axis is in the front-rear direction, and includes a shaft portion 977 disposed below the right portion of the croon 971 and a receiving plate portion 978 extending leftward from the shaft portion 977. A reference position where the receiving plate portion 978 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (slightly tilted downward to the left) and a maximum tilt position where the receiving plate portion 978 is tilted downward by approximately 60 degrees to 80 degrees from the reference position. It is configured to be movable between the two. Further, the distributor 976 is biased toward the reference position by a coil spring (not shown).

On the left side of the sorter 976, there is a disengagement path 979 in which game balls are guided by the sorter 976 located at or near the reference position, and a passage 979 in which game balls are guided by the sorter 976 located at or near the maximum inclination position. There are provided a 15R guide path 980 where balls are guided, and an 8R guide path 981 where game balls are guided by a sorter 976 located at an intermediate position between the reference position and the maximum inclination position. When a game ball is detected by the disconnection detection switch 982 provided in the disconnection path 979, 15 game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 19. When a game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 983 provided in the 15R guide path 980, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19, and a jackpot state of "15R jackpot" is started. . When a game ball is detected by the 8R ball entry detection switch 984 provided in the 8R guidance path 981, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19, and a jackpot state of "8R jackpot" is started. .

Note that the 8R guide passage 981 is longer than the disengagement passage 979, and the 15R guide passage 980 is longer than the 8R guide passage 981. As a result, before the game ball guided to the outgoing path 979 is detected by the outgoing detection switch 982, the game ball guided to the 8R guidance path 981 or the 15R guidance path 980 is detected by the 8R ball entry detection switch 984 or the 15R Before the game ball detected by the ball entry detection switch 983 and guided to the 8R guidance path 981 is detected by the 8R ball entry detection switch 984, the game ball guided to the 15R guidance path 980 is detected to enter the 15R guidance path. It is configured to be detected by switch 983.

Then, when the parking shutter 975 is set to the open position from the state in which the game balls are parked in the eight parking sections 974, all of the game balls that were parked in each of the parking sections 974 are sorted at the reference position. It will fall into container 976. In this embodiment, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls parked in the eight stopping parts 974, it is determined which of the release path 979, the 15R guidance path 980, and the 8R guidance path 981 the game balls are guided to. It looks like this. In other words, if the parking shutter 975 is set to the open position with only one game ball parked in the parking section 974, even if a game ball falls into the distribution device 976, the distribution device 976 will be subject to almost no rotational displacement. Instead, the game ball comes off and is guided to the path 979. When the parking shutter 975 is set to the open position with game balls parked in all eight parking parts 974, when the game ball falls into the distribution device 976, the distribution device 976 rotates to the maximum open position. At least one of the game balls is guided to the 15R guide path 980. In other cases, the larger the number of game balls placed on the stationary shutter 975, or the more the game balls fall locally (toward the tip of the receiving plate 978) even if the number of balls is the same, the more the sorter 976 tends to tilt significantly toward the maximum open position.

Further, an early detection switch 985 is provided to detect each game ball parked in each parking section 974. In this example, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays suggestions such as the possibility of a jackpot state being given and what type of jackpot state will be given based on the detection information of the early detection switch 985. It looks like this. In other words, when 8 game balls are parked in the croon 971, "15R jackpot expectation maximum" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and when 1 or 2 game balls are parked, If there are 3 or 4 game balls parked, the message ``Still doing your best'' will be displayed, and if 5 to 7 game balls are parked, ``That's how it is'' will be displayed. In this case, "You can still go" will be displayed. It should be noted that the system may be configured to display suggestions by taking into account not only the information on the number of parked game balls but also the arrangement information.

In this embodiment, the ball entry route is configured by the distributing device 976 together with the exit path 979, the 15R guidance path 980, and the 8R guidance path 981. In addition, when the game ball parked in the stop section 974 is guided to the 15R guide path 980 or the 8R guide path 981, which is advantageous for the player, the stop section 974 where the game ball was parked becomes This corresponds to the second stop.

As described above, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls parked by the type sorting device 741 (Clune 971) in the parked state, the parked game balls may come off and move to the path 979, the 15R guidance path 980, and the 8R guidance path. It is determined which path 981 the user will be guided through. In other words, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping as many game balls as possible. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of allowing the player to enjoy the gameplay by letting as many game balls as possible enter the specific area 401 is more reliably achieved.

Further, since early detection switches 985 are provided individually corresponding to the eight parking portions 974, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of parked game balls, etc. Then, it is possible to perform an effect such as that the game ball is guided to the 15R guidance path 980, or that there are not enough (how many) game balls stopped to generate a jackpot condition, etc. It is possible to improve the

In addition, in (u), (v), and (w) above, the bottom of the stopping part is removed so that the game ball parked in the stopping part is guided to the downstream side (guiding path). However, for example, the stopping part of the sorting board is configured as a bottomed recess, and the sorting board is configured to be rotatable by a driving means, so that when the game ball is stopped at the stopping part, the sorting board is stopped. It may be configured such that the game ball parked in the stop part is guided to the downstream side by rotating the part downward.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, and includes a game area in which the game balls can move, and the game balls fired by a firing means are guided to the game area.
In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the pachinko machine is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is set in an open state that allows a game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases in which special gaming conditions that are advantageous to the player occur.
By the way, gaming machines are constantly being required to add new features, such as by incorporating new configurations.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can add new interest.
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
As a result of the winning lottery, the first result (the game ball being detected by the 3R ball entering detection switch 736) is in a waiting state (the game ball is stopped in the 3R stopping part 933), and The result of step 2 (the game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, or the game ball is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735) is in a waiting state (the game ball is detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 735). A state in which the ball is stopped, or a state in which the game ball is stopped at the 7R stop portion 934) may occur.
The second result is a result more advantageous to the player than the first result,
Both the first result and the second result may be in a waiting state,
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, it is taught in a predetermined manner that the first result is awaited, and the first result and the second result are awaited. A first standby teaching means (3R standby lamp 944, 7R standby lamp) capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are on standby. standby lamp 945 and 15R standby lamp 946),
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the predetermined aspect does not teach that the first result is awaited, and the first result is In a state where both the second result and the second result are on standby, it is possible to teach that the second result is on standby without teaching in the predetermined manner that the first result is on standby. a second standby teaching means (decorative pattern display device 42);
An upper limit is set on the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait, and when the upper limit of the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait is reached, no more The first result and the second result are not waited for,
The second waiting teaching means is configured to be able to display characters to teach that the second result is waiting,
comprising means for resolving the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited (configuration in which the stationary rotating body 937 rotates);
The canceling means is characterized in that it is brought into a stopped state after the operation for canceling the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited is completed.
According to claim 1, new interest can be added.

A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, to have a game area in which the game balls can move, and to guide the game balls fired by a firing means to the game area.

In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases where a special game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In addition, in order to add interest to the behavior of the game ball from the time the game ball enters the specific area to the special ball entry means, the game ball that enters the specific area is controlled to enter the special ball entry means. Some are equipped with a sorting means that randomly divides the balls into those that allow the ball to enter and those that do not allow the ball to enter. Furthermore, a first guide route (normal route) that can guide game balls that have entered a specific area to special ball entry means while intervening the aforementioned distribution means, and a first guide route (normal route) that can guide game balls that have entered a specific area to the Some players are equipped with a second guide route (special route) that can lead to a special ball entry means with higher probability than the first guide route.

By the way, if a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, the player may be in a situation where it is considered advantageous to allow the game balls to enter the special ball entry means. However, there is a risk that the game balls will interfere with each other (by hitting each other at the entrance to the second guide route, etc.), and a situation may occur where it is impossible to enter the second guide route. be. As a result, when multiple game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, contrary to the player's expectations, it is actually less effective than when multiple game balls enter the specific area one by one. There is a concern that the level of expectation for ball entry using special ball entry means will decline.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to more reliably advance the game advantageously by allowing a plurality of game balls to enter a specific area at once. Our goal is to provide gaming machines that can

Means A-0-a. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
A gaming machine comprising a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter,
The specific ball entering means is
a first ball entry means (non-special ball entry means) that is configured to allow a game ball to enter the specific area and performs a first award when the game ball enters the specific area;
a second ball entry means configured to allow a game ball to enter the specific area, and to perform a second award more advantageous to the player than the first award when the game ball enters the specific area; special entry means) and
comprising a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the second ball entry means;
and a second guide route that can guide game balls that have entered the specific area to the second ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route,
A route distribution means is provided at a branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route to guide the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route,
The route distribution means is
The game ball is configured to be changeable between a first guide state in which the game ball is guided to the first guide route and a second guide state in which the game ball is guided to the second guide route,
The game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the first guidance state by guiding one game ball to the route allocating means,
A game machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second guiding state by guiding a plurality of game balls to the route allocating means.

According to the means A-0-a, a route allocating means is provided that allows a plurality of game balls to enter a specific area and guide all of these game balls to the second guide route. ing. Therefore, it is possible to match the simultaneous entry of a plurality of game balls into a specific area with the increase in the expectation of ball entry into the special ball entry means, and by extension, it is possible to make multiple game balls enter a specific area at once and to increase the expectation of balls entering the special ball entry means. The player's expectation that since the balls were entered in bulk, it would be advantageous to enter the game balls into the special ball entry means, and the fact that multiple game balls were actually guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where even if multiple game balls enter a specific area at once, it does not contribute to the expected occurrence of special ball entry means, or in fact it decreases. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game balls that meets the player's expectations, such as increasing the expectation of the occurrence of the special ball entry means by letting a plurality of game balls enter the ball at once.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first benefit is given, and a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the player receives the first benefit. ``An advantageous (beneficial) second benefit is granted.'' The "first benefit" mentioned here includes being given a first specified number of gaming values, being given a state such as making it easier to enter a ball into a specific ball entering means, and the like. Further, "a first advantageous state is given when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, and a first advantageous state is given when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the game is more advantageous than the first advantageous state." It is also possible to provide a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the person. The "first advantageous state" mentioned here is not necessarily limited to a case in which a state advantageous to the player is provided, but the provision of the first advantageous state allows the player to maintain the status quo or become more disadvantageous than the current situation. This is intended to include the case where the state changes.

Means A-0-b-1. The route allocating means is configured to be able to change its posture between a standard posture that guides the game ball to the second guide route and a changed posture that guides the game ball to the first guide route,
The game machine according to means A-0-a, characterized in that the reference posture is maintained by each of the game balls coming into contact with a plurality of specific points of the route allocating means.

According to means A-0-b, in order to maintain the reference position of the route allocating means, it is necessary to cause a plurality of game balls to enter a specific area and reach the route allocating means. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more reliable in that it is more advantageous for the player to have a plurality of game balls enter a specific area than to have one ball enter the specific area. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest by changing the destination of the game ball depending on the balance of the route distribution means when guiding the game ball.

Means A-0-b-2. The specific location includes a first specific location and a second specific location,
a first introduction path that guides game balls that have entered the specific area to the first specific location;
The gaming machine according to means A-0-b-1, further comprising a second introduction path for guiding game balls that have entered the specific area to the second specific location.

According to means A-0-b-2, the chances of bringing the game ball into contact with the first specific location and the second specific location at the same time are increased, or the game ball is brought into contact with the first specific location and the second specific location. The guiding (placing) position can be determined at a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area will all be guided to the second guide route.

Means A-0-b-3. a first entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage;
The game machine according to means A-0-b-2, further comprising a second entry detection means for detecting game balls moving in the second introduction passage.

According to means A-0-b-3, it is possible to perform an effect such as teaching a player a moment that is pleasing to the player, such as two game balls being guided to a first specific location and a second specific location at the same time. can.

Means A-0-c. The route allocating means is configured to be changeable between a standard posture that guides the game ball to the first guide route and a changed posture that guides the game ball to the second guide route,
As described in means A-0-a, the route allocating means is configured to be able to change its posture from the standard posture to the changed posture when receiving a load of a specified amount or more from the game ball. gaming machines.

According to means A-0-c, in order to change the attitude of the route allocating means to the changing attitude, it is necessary to cause a plurality of game balls to enter a specific area and reach the route allocating means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a more reliable gaming experience in which it is more advantageous for the player to have a plurality of game balls enter a specific area than to have one ball enter the specific area. Furthermore, by allowing the route allocating means to support more game balls, it is possible to add interest by changing the guide destination of the game balls to a better one.

Means A-1. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
A gaming machine comprising a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter,
The specific ball entering means is
special ball entry means configured to allow a game ball to enter the specific area, and to provide a special game state advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area;
a non-special ball entry means into which game balls other than the game balls that enter the special ball entry means among the game balls that entered the specific area enter;
comprising a guide path for guiding game balls that have entered the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means;
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
a second guide route that can guide game balls that have entered the specific area to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route;
A route distribution means is provided at a branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route to guide the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route,
The route distribution means is
When sorting one game ball by guiding one game ball to the route allocating means, guiding the one game ball to the first guide route;
By guiding a plurality of game balls to the route allocating means at the same time, the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route when allocating the plurality of game balls at the same time. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, a route distribution means is provided that can guide all of these game balls to the second guide route. There is. For this reason, it is possible to match the simultaneous entry of a plurality of game balls into a specific area with the increase in the expectation of ball entry into the special ball entry means, and in turn, it is possible to match the simultaneous entry of a plurality of game balls into a specific area with the goal of increasing the expectation of ball entry into the special ball entry means. The player's expectation that since the balls were entered all at once, it would be advantageous to enter the game balls into the special ball entry means, and the fact that multiple game balls were actually guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which even if multiple game balls enter a specific area at once, it does not contribute to the expected occurrence of special ball entry means, or in fact it decreases. On the other hand, by letting a plurality of game balls enter at once, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game balls that meets the player's expectations, such as increasing the expectation of the occurrence of the special ball entry means.

In addition, "the route allocating means may guide the game ball to the first guide route when allocating one game ball".

Means A-2. The route distribution means is
a rotatably supported shaft;
a first wing portion protruding from the shaft portion toward one side of the shaft portion;
a second wing portion protruding from the shaft portion toward the other side of the shaft portion;
The first wing portion and the second wing portion are in an equilibrium state in a reference posture protruding from the shaft portion to both sides, and the upper surfaces of the first wing portion and the second wing portion in the reference posture are configured. (and slopes downward toward both sides) a guide surface communicates with the second guide route,
The game ball that enters the specific area is guided by the guide surface of the first wing section or the second wing section,
When a game ball is guided to the first wing section or the second wing section, the route distribution means rotates due to the force received from the game ball, and the rotation of the route distribution means causes the guide the surface communicates with the first guide route, and the game ball is guided to the first guide route,
When the game ball is guided to the first wing section and the second wing section almost simultaneously, (the weight on the first wing section side and the weight on the second wing section side are balanced). ,) The reference attitude is maintained (rotation of the route allocating means is suppressed), and the reference attitude is maintained (rotation of the route allocating means is avoided), so that the first wing section The game machine according to means A-1, wherein the game balls guided by the second wing section are each guided to the second guide route.

According to means A-2, it is possible to realize a configuration that guides a plurality of (two) game balls to the second guide route at the same time while employing a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the route is switched depending on whether or not there are multiple game balls using a detection means and a driving means for detecting game balls, doubts that may cause players to feel distrust arise. It is possible to reduce this, and to appeal to fairness.

Means A-3. A ball entry opening that is an entrance to the specific area of the specific ball entry means, and a pair of blade members that open and close the ball entry opening,
Guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area through the first ball entry opening among the ball entry openings to the first wing section (dropping it onto the guide surface of the first wing section); 1 introduction passage,
A game ball that has entered the specific area through a second ball entry opening among the ball entry openings is guided to the second wing section (dropped onto the guide surface of the second wing section). 2. The gaming machine according to means A-2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a second introduction passage.

According to means A-3, the chances of bringing the game ball into contact with the first wing part and the second wing part at the same time are increased, and the game ball is guided (placed) with respect to the first wing part and the second wing part. ) can be set to a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area will all be guided to the second guide route. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a game feature in which the game ball is launched (aimed, desired) so that the game ball enters both the left and right ball entry openings.

Means A-4. a first entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first introduction passage;
and second entry detection means for detecting game balls moving in the second introduction passage,
In the process of determining the presence or absence of detection by the first intrusion detection means and the second intrusion detection means, either detection is confirmed by both of the first intrusion detection means and the second intrusion detection means; The gaming machine according to means A-3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to derive a different performance depending on when only one detection is confirmed.

According to means A-4, it is possible for the player to recognize and enjoy the joyful moment for the player, such as when two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing section and the second wing section of the route distribution means. can.

Means A-5. The route distribution means is
a shaft portion rotatably supported so that the central axis extends in the left-right direction;
a front piece protruding forward from the shaft and disposed in the specific area;
and a rear piece projecting rearward from the shaft,
Of the route distribution means, the weight on the front piece side of the shaft part is lighter than the weight on the rear piece side of the shaft part,
The front piece closes the second guide route, and the guide surface forming the upper surface of the front piece communicates with the first guide route (and slopes downward toward the first guide route). ) is assumed to be in equilibrium at the reference posture,
The game ball that enters the specific ball entry means is guided by the guide surface of the front piece,
When a predetermined number or more of game balls are placed on the front piece of the route allocating means in the reference position, the front piece of the route allocating means is placed on the front piece of the route allocating means than the shaft part. The weight on the rear piece side becomes heavier than the weight on the rear piece side than the shaft part, and the route distribution means rotates so that the front piece tilts downward, and the route distribution means rotates. rotates, the guide surface communicates with the second guide route, and the game ball is guided to the second guide route,
If the number of game balls resting on the front piece of the route allocating means in the reference posture is less than the specified number, the weight of the route allocating means is closer to the front piece than the shaft. The weight of the rear piece is lighter than that of the shaft, the reference posture of the route distribution means is maintained (rotation is avoided), and the game ball is guided to the first guide route. The gaming machine according to means A-1, characterized in that:

According to means A-5, it is possible to realize a configuration that guides a plurality of game balls to the second guide route at the same time while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, compared to the case where an elastic body such as a spring or rubber is used in the route distribution means, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, and the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

Means A-6. The specific ball entering means is
Special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means (and
non-special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means;
When a game ball is detected by the special entering ball detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than a state in which the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained), the special game state is activated. In gaming machines that are granted the right to generate
comprising a type lottery area where game balls that enter the special entry ball means and are detected by the special entry ball detection means are guided;
In a state where a game ball is present in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than the state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined), (in the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is a first special gaming state;
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than the state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined), (in the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state;
A first type determination time until a game ball entering the type lottery area is detected by the first type entering ball detection means,
Means A-1 to A characterized in that the second type determination time is longer than the second type determination time until the game ball entering the type lottery area is detected by the second type ball entering detection means. -5. The gaming machine described in any of 5.

According to means A-6, basically the same effects as means B-1, which will be described later, are achieved. In addition, when adopting the configuration of means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, all of these game balls are easily guided to the second guide route, and as a result, , there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will enter the special ball entry means in succession. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of the present means A-6 in which the successive input of a plurality of game balls into the special ball entry means is not wasted, a plurality of game balls can be inputted into the special ball entry means. The effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by the game balls being wasted or lost even if the game balls are hit continuously can be more effectively achieved.

B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, to have a game area in which the game balls can move, and to guide the game balls fired by a firing means to the game area.

In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the pachinko machine is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is set in an open state that allows the game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases where a special game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means during the special gaming state or in a state where the right to the special gaming state has been obtained, further special gaming states will not be granted. Not done. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon occurs, such as multiple game balls entering the special ball entry means in succession, the right to be granted the special gaming state will only be granted once, and the player will not be able to make a loss. There is a concern that people may get the impression that it is a waste, etc. As a result, there is a concern that a situation may arise where the player is not happy about the situation even though the player has come to a favorable situation such as being granted a special gaming state.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to suppress the decline in interest caused by a plurality of game balls consecutively entering the special ball entry means. Our goal is to provide gaming machines that can.

Means B-0-a. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
The specific ball entering means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
A first award is performed when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entering detection means,
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means, a second award more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
A first type determination time until a game ball entering the specific area is detected by the first type ball entry detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be longer than a second type determination time until a game ball entering the specific area is detected by the second type ball entering detection means.

In addition, "the first benefit is granted when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, and the first benefit is granted when a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means. It is also possible to provide a second benefit that is more advantageous (beneficial) to the player than the player. The "first benefit" mentioned here includes being given a first specified number of gaming values, being given a state such as making it easier to enter a ball into a specific ball entering means, and the like. Further, "a first advantageous state is given when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entering detection means, and a first advantageous state is given when a game ball is detected by the second type ball entering detection means. A second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state may be provided. The "first advantageous state" mentioned here is not necessarily limited to a case in which a state advantageous to the player is provided, but the provision of the first advantageous state allows the player to maintain the status quo or become more disadvantageous than the current situation. This is intended to include the case of transitioning to a state.

Means B-0-b. In the specific area,
a first guide path that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding game balls that have reached a predetermined position in the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path,
The entrance of the first guide passage is located upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area than the entrance of the second guide passage,
The gaming machine according to means B-0-a, wherein the first guiding passage is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guiding passage is longer than that of the second guiding passage.

Means B-0-c. A covering means is provided that is arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage,
The gaming machine according to means B-0-b, wherein the visibility of the gaming ball changes before and after the gaming ball enters the first guiding path.

Means B-0-d. Means B-0-b or B-0-c, characterized in that an entrance display section indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. Game machine.

Means B-1. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
The specific ball entering means is
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the specific area;
(a non-special ball entry means into which game balls other than the game balls entering the special ball entry means among game balls that have entered the specific area enter the special ball entry means);
Special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means (and
non-special ball entry detection means) for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means;
When a game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection means, it is advantageous for the player (in a state other than a special game state or a state in which the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained). ) In a gaming machine that is granted the right to generate a special gaming state,
comprising a type lottery area in which a game ball that enters the special entry ball detection means and is detected by the special entry ball detection means is guided;
In a state where a game ball is present in the type lottery area, another game ball can enter the special ball entry means and enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than the state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined), (in the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is a first special gaming state;
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than the state in which the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted has already been determined), (in the state), the type of the special gaming state to which the right to generate is granted is a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state;
A first type determination time until a game ball entering the type lottery area is detected by the first type entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be longer than a second type determination time until a game ball entering the type lottery area is detected by the second type ball entry detection means.

According to means B-1, after the game ball that has entered the special ball entry means is detected by the special ball entry detection means, it is not discharged outside the game area (specific area), but is ejected to the outside of the game area (specific area). It is configured to enter a part of the type lottery area. Then, an analog lottery (type lottery) is carried out to determine the type of special game state, such as whether the game ball enters into the first type ball entry means or the second type ball entry means. It has become. Therefore, when game balls enter the special entry ball means continuously, the special game state that is given corresponds to the game ball that is first detected by the special entry ball detection means among the game balls that consecutively passed through. Although it is only one time, all of the plurality of game balls that have entered the special ball entry means almost consecutively can be utilized in the subsequent type lottery.

Furthermore, the first type determination time until the game ball entering the type lottery area is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, which triggers the generation of the first special game state, is longer than the first special game state. It is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type ball entry detection means, which triggers the occurrence of the second special gaming state that is advantageous for the player. For this reason, for example, among a plurality of game balls that successively enter the special ball entry means, the preceding game ball heads toward the first type ball entry means, and the subsequent game ball heads toward the second type ball entry means. Even in such a case, it is possible to cause the subsequent game balls to enter the second type ball entry means first, thereby generating a second special game state that is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, the subsequent game balls can be utilized more reliably. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's feelings of loss and waste when a plurality of game balls enter the special ball entry means in succession, and it is also possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by this. can.

Means B-2. In the type lottery area,
a first guide path that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding game balls that have entered the type lottery area to the first guide path or the second guide path,
The entrance of the first guide passage is located upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area than the entrance of the second guide passage,
The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein the first guiding passage is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guiding passage is longer than that of the second guiding passage.

According to means B-2, the game ball that entered the type lottery area was not guided to the first type ball entering means by the type sorting means (it was not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the first type ball entering means). In this case, the game ball is guided to the second type ball entry means. In other words, by bringing the ball that enters the second type of ball entry method, which is advantageous to the player, later (so that the player who stays until the end has a better result), it is possible to expect excitement in the game. can.

Furthermore, of the first guiding passage and the second guiding passage, the entrance of the passage that can be expected to generate a special gaming state more advantageous to the player is arranged on the downstream side. In this case, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide path side by the type sorting means, the following game ball is not sorted by type. If the game ball is guided toward the first guide path by the means, the subsequent game ball will reach the first guide path earlier.

In this regard, according to the present means, the first guide path is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than that of the second guide path (longer distance, gentler angle, etc.). For this reason, for example, even though the preceding game ball was guided to the second guidance path, the subsequent game ball was guided to the first guidance path, and the preceding game ball was guided to the second type ball entry means. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entry means before the ball enters the ball, and a first special game state occurs.

In addition, the second guiding passage only requires a shorter time for the game ball to pass through than the first guiding passage. This is intended to include a conceptual second guide path in which the distance of the guide path is zero. In addition, in order to increase the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide path, it is conceivable to lengthen the travel distance of the game ball required to pass through the first guide path, but in this case, the distance of the first guide path In addition to the structure that lengthens the time, for example, a delay means that allows the game ball to go back and forth in the same place several times or circles before moving on, or a system that temporarily stops the momentum of the game ball and takes a relatively long time. A configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for guiding the user to the next location is installed in the first guide path. Incidentally, such a delay means may also be installed in the second guide passage, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second guide passage is longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage. Install something that won't get too long.

Means B-3. comprising an early detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first guide path,
According to means B-2, the method is configured to be capable of deriving an advance opening performance that suggests that the first special gaming state is started when the detection by the early detection means is performed. Game machine.

Although it is certain that the game ball that enters the first guidance path will enter the first type ball entry means, the time taken for the game ball to pass through the first guidance path is longer than that of the second guidance path. Due to the configuration, there is a relatively long time lag between when the game ball enters the first guide path and when the ball enters the first type ball entry means (until it is detected by the first type ball entry detection means). It is conceivable that this may occur. In this case, for example, if a game ball single-shot enters the special ball entry means and further enters the first guidance path, it is determined that the first special game state will occur at this point (player However, it took a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first guiding path, and it was difficult to get through the first guiding path. This may lead to a situation where the special game state is not started.

In this regard, according to means B-3, a preliminary opening performance is derived that suggests that the first special game state is started at the time when a game ball is detected by the early detection means installed in the first guide path. Since the configuration is configured such that this is possible, such concerns can be eliminated. Therefore, it takes too long between when the occurrence of the first special game state is actually decided and when the first special game state starts (there is no reaction), and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to prevent situations such as a decline in interest.

Note that the advance opening performance is different from the opening performance that is performed as part of the special game state, and is not included in the first special game state (even if the appearance is the same, it is a pseudo opening performance), The first special game state is not started at the time when the detection by the early detection means is performed, but the first special game state is started at the time when the detection by the first ball entry detection means is performed.

In addition, "uncertain element determination processing for determining whether or not a game ball other than the detected game ball exists in the specific area when the detection by the early detection means is performed; and When a negative determination is made in the deterministic element determination process, the ball enters the first type ball entry means guided by the first guide path in which the early detection means in which the game ball was detected is provided. The first special game state may be configured to be configured to be able to execute a preceding opening process for deriving a preceding opening performance that teaches that the first special game state is to be started. In this case, before the game ball detected by the early detection means is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, another game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means or the second type ball entry detection means. By being detected, it is possible to avoid a situation where a contradiction occurs between the mode of the preceding opening performance and the type of special game state that actually occurs, and the first special game state occurs in the preceding opening performance. I can teach you things. In addition, if the type of special gaming state is not taught in the advance opening performance (in the case where it is only taught that either the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state will occur), this problem will not occur. Although this does not occur, if the type of special gaming state is configured to be teachable, it is possible to improve performance and give the player a sense of security.

Means B-4. The first special game state includes a first opening pattern in which an opening effect that teaches that the first special game state is to be started is performed for a first time, and a second opening pattern in which the opening effect is shorter than the first time. There is a second opening pattern in which the opening performance is omitted, or a second opening pattern in which the opening performance is omitted.
When the first type of ball entry detection means detects and generates the first special game state, if the preceding opening effect has been derived, the second opening pattern is selected. The gaming machine according to feature B-3.

According to means B-4, when the preliminary opening performance is being performed, by further performing the opening performance for the first time, it is possible to prevent the opening performance from becoming too long. Therefore, problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game can be more reliably avoided.

Means B-5. Entry detection means for detecting all game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the special ball entry means and the non-special ball entry means;
It is configured to be able to count the number of game balls in the specific area, and a value is added based on the detection by the entry detection means, and the non-special entry detection means, the early detection means, and the second type. The gaming machine according to means B-3 or B-4, further comprising a first counting means for subtracting a value based on detection by the ball entry detection means.

According to means B-5, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball jam has occurred, or to determine whether or not there are game balls other than the game balls detected by the early detection means in a specific area. It is possible to distinguish between them. Therefore, it is possible to handle errors caused by ball jams, improve the accuracy of the advance opening performance, and increase the amount of information in the advance opening performance, thereby improving gameplay and performance. .

Means B-6. When the detection by the early detection means is performed, based on the value of the first counting means, the non-special entry detection means, the early detection means, and the first It is determined whether or not a game ball exists in the area upstream of the two-type ball entry detection means, and when it is determined that there is no game ball, the preceding opening performance is derived, and when it is determined that there is, the aforementioned Promotion reception state teaching means is provided for teaching that the type of special game state is a promotion reception state in which the type has not yet been determined (the possibility of entering the game ball into the second guidance passage remains). The gaming machine according to means B-5, characterized in that:

According to means B-6, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area and the preceding game ball enters the first guide path, the first special game state still does not occur. It is possible to make the player more reliably aware that the configuration is such that the second special game state has not been determined and there remains a possibility that the second special game state will occur unless a subsequent game ball enters the first guide path. can. Therefore, it is possible to have a more reliable understanding of the gameplay, and in the case of a situation like the above example, it is possible to understand the behavior of subsequent game balls, the successive entry of game balls into the type lottery area, etc. You can get them to have a stronger interest in it.

Means B-7. A first configured to be able to count the number of game balls in the specific area, and a value is added based on the detection by the early detection means, and a value is subtracted based on the detection by the first type ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-3 to B-6, characterized in that it is equipped with a 2-count means.

According to means B-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to handle errors caused by ball jams, improve the accuracy of advance opening performances, and increase the amount of information for advance opening performances, thereby improving gameplay and performance. .

Means B-8. The specific ball entry means includes a guide path for guiding game balls that have entered the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means,
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
a second guide route that can guide game balls that have entered the specific area to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first guide route;
A route distribution means is provided at a branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route to guide the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route,
The route distribution means is
When sorting one game ball by guiding one game ball to the route allocating means, guiding the one game ball to the first guide route;
By guiding a plurality of game balls to the route allocating means at the same time, the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route when allocating the plurality of game balls at the same time. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, characterized in that:

According to the means B-8, basically the same effect as the above-mentioned means A-1 is achieved. In addition, when adopting the configuration of the means B-8, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area at almost the same time, all of these game balls are easily guided to the second guide route, As a result, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will enter the special ball entry means in succession. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of means B-1 that does not waste a plurality of game balls consecutively entering the special ball entry means, a plurality of game balls can enter the special ball entry means. The effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by balls being wasted or lost even if the balls are hit continuously can be more effectively achieved.

Means B-9. A covering means is provided that is arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage (reducing visibility of the first guide passage),
The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guiding path.

According to means B-9, the entrance of the first guide passage can be likened to the entrance of the first type ball entry means. Therefore, basically, the premise of the gameplay that the first special game state will occur if the ball enters the entrance of the first guide path can be made easier to understand. In addition, since the first guide path shaped to delay the game ball is visible, it is possible to prevent the design from deteriorating and the type lottery area from looking complicated.

Means B-10. a first guide path for guiding game balls moving in the specific area to the first type ball entry means;
In a configuration comprising a second guide path for leading the game ball moving in the specific area to the second type ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-9, characterized in that an entrance display section indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. .

According to means B-10, the locations of the entrances of the first guidance passage and the second guidance passage are clarified, and the gameplay such as which of the first guidance passage or the second guidance passage the game ball enters can be more easily understood. can do. Note that the entrance display section may be configured to be able to change its appearance based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entry route.

Means B-11. comprising an entry detection means for detecting all game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the special ball entry means and the non-special ball entry means;
Means B-1 to B characterized by comprising a detection history storage means for accumulating and storing detection information of the entry detection means, the first type ball entry detection means, and the second type ball entry detection means. -10. The gaming machine according to any one of 10.

According to means B-11, since the history of the behavior of the game ball in a specific area is more clearly recorded, troubles regarding where the game ball entered between the player and the game hall occur and become complicated. This can be avoided. Note that the detection history storage means may also be configured to accumulate and store detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more reliably investigate misunderstandings, etc., including the advance opening performance. Further, the storage contents of the detection history storage means may be configured to be able to be derived to the display means of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the detection information may be configured to be outputted to the outside so that the hall computer can also grasp the same detection information as the detection history storage means. In addition, in the case where the time of the time grasping means provided in the gaming machine for grasping the current time and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such effects will be more pronounced.

Means B-12. type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entering the type lottery area;
vibration detection means for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine;
and a display means,
Any one of means B-1 to B-11, characterized in that when the type entry detection means detects, the display means displays a display urging caution not to vibrate the gaming machine. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to means B-12, it is possible to prevent the player from shaking the gaming machine due to being too enthusiastic about the game, and the shaking of the gaming machine causes a change in the behavior of the gaming ball. Such situations can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the gaming machine vibrates, which is undesirable for both the player and the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, and includes a game area in which the game balls can move, and the game balls fired by a firing means are guided to the game area.

In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the pachinko machine is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is set in an open state that allows a game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases where a special game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, gaming machines are constantly being required to incorporate new configurations to improve new interests.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can add new interest.

Means C-1. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
The specific ball entering means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
A first award is performed when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entering detection means,
In a gaming machine, when a game ball is detected by the second type of ball entering detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
The game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter the specific area, and the game ball entering the specific area is sure to enter the first type ball entry means (detected by the first type ball entry detection means). Entry route and
A game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter the specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area is sure to enter the second type ball entry means (detected by the second type ball entry detection means). Entry route and
early detection means provided on at least one of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route to detect a game ball;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: early teaching means capable of teaching information regarding detection by the early detection means.

According to means C-1, the game ball entering the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means can be prevented from entering the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means. It is possible to understand the ball before it hits the ball and give corresponding instructions. Therefore, it is possible to perform effects regarding the entry of game balls into the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means from a stage before the ball enters. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of discomfort in which there is no corresponding reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) even though it has already been decided that the ball will enter the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means.

Means C-2. The entrance of the first ball entry route is located upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area than the entrance of the second ball entry route,
The first ball entry route is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second ball entry route,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the early detection means includes a first early detection means provided at least on the first ball entry route.

According to means C-2, the game ball that has entered the specific area can enter the second ball entry route if it has not entered the first ball entry route. In other words, by bringing the ball that enters the second type of ball entry method, which is advantageous to the player, later (so that the player who stays until the end has a better result), it is possible to expect excitement in the game. can.

Further, in this way, of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route, the entrance of the second ball entry route, which is expected to provide a second award that is more advantageous to the player, is arranged on the downstream side. If such a configuration is adopted, for example, if two game balls enter a specific area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second ball entry route, the following game ball will be guided to the first ball entry route. If the ball is guided to the ball entry route side, there is a concern that the subsequent game balls may reach the first ball entry route sooner.

In this regard, according to the present means, the first ball entry route is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second ball entry route (longer distance, gentler angle, etc.). . For this reason, for example, even though the preceding game ball was guided to the second ball entry route, the subsequent game ball was guided to the first ball entry route, and the preceding game ball entered the second type of entry route. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation where a subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entry means before the ball enters the ball means and the first award occurs.

Furthermore, if the time required for the game ball to pass through the first ball entry route is increased, the game ball enters the first ball entry route, enters the first type ball entry means, and enters the first type entry route. There is a concern that a relatively large time lag may occur until the ball is detected by the ball detection means. In this means, an early detection switch is provided on the first ball entry route, and it is possible to derive a reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) corresponding to the game ball entering the first ball entry route. Become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of discomfort due to a discrepancy between the behavior of the game ball and the reaction of the game machine.

Means C-3. Means C-2, characterized in that the method is configured to be capable of deriving an advance opening effect that suggests that the first provision is performed when the first early detection means detects the first provision. Game machine.

According to means C-3, it is possible to derive a preliminary opening effect that suggests that the first award will be made at the time when a game ball is detected by the first early detection means installed on the first ball entry route. Therefore, for example, if a game ball enters a specific area single-shot and then enters the first ball entry route, the first award is determined at this point (as a player, the first award is determined). 2) Despite this, it took a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first entry route, and it was difficult to get the first award. It is possible to avoid a situation where the process is not performed. Therefore, it takes too much time between when the first award is actually decided and when the first award is made (there is no reaction), which slows down the tempo of the game and reduces interest. It is possible to prevent such situations.

Means C-4. When the first grant and the second grant are performed, the first grant and the second grant are performed at the beginning of the first grant and the second grant. An opening performance was held to teach the audience what to expect.
When the first type of ball entry detection means and the second type of ball entry detection means are detected,
In a state where the advance opening performance is not performed, the first provision or the second provision of a first opening pattern in which the opening performance is performed for a first time is started,
In a state where the preceding opening performance is being performed, the opening performance is performed for a second time period shorter than the first time period, or the first provision of a second opening pattern in which the opening performance is omitted; , the gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the second award is started.

According to means C-4, when the preliminary opening performance is being performed, by further performing the opening performance for the first time, it is possible to prevent the opening performance from becoming too long. Therefore, problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game can be more reliably avoided.

Means C-5. Entry detection means for detecting all game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route;
It is configured to be able to count the number of game balls in the specific area, and a value is added based on detection by the entry detection means, and detection by the first early detection means and the second type ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means C-3 or C-4, further comprising a first counting means for subtracting a value based on.

According to means C-5, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball jam has occurred in a specific area, or to determine whether there are game balls other than game balls detected by the early detection means in a specific area. It is possible to determine whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to handle errors caused by ball jams, improve the accuracy of advance opening performances, and increase the amount of information for advance opening performances, thereby improving gameplay and performance. .

Means C-6. When the detection by the early detection means is performed, based on the value of the first counting means, the ball entry detection means is located downstream of the entry detection means and upstream of the early detection means and the second type of ball entry detection means. It is determined whether or not a game ball exists in a certain area on the side, and when it is determined that there is no game ball, the preceding opening effect is derived, and when it is determined that there is a game ball, the preceding opening effect is derived (instead of the preceding opening effect). The game according to means C-5, characterized in that a promotion acceptance state teaching means is provided for teaching that the promotion acceptance state is such that there is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entry route. Machine.

According to means C-6, for example, at the time when two game balls enter the specific area and the preceding game ball enters the first ball entry route, the first award has not yet been determined. , it is possible to make the player more reliably aware that the configuration is such that there remains a possibility that the second award will be made as long as the subsequent game ball does not enter the first ball entry route. Therefore, it is possible to have a more reliable understanding of the gameplay, and in the case of a situation like the above example, it is possible to understand the behavior of subsequent game balls, the continuous entry of game balls into a specific area, etc. You can get them to have a stronger interest in it.

Means C-7. Means C characterized by comprising a second counting means for adding a value based on the detection by the early detection means and subtracting a value based on the detection by the first type ball entry detection means. -3 to gaming machine according to any one of C-6.

According to the means C-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball jam has occurred in the first ball entry route. Therefore, it is possible to handle errors caused by ball jams, improve the accuracy of advance opening performances, and increase the amount of information for advance opening performances, thereby improving gameplay and performance. .

Means C-8. In the specific area,
a first guide path constituting the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path constituting the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding game balls that have entered the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path,
A covering means is provided that is arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage (reducing visibility of the first guide passage),
The game machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, characterized in that the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guiding path.

According to means C-8, the entrance of the first guiding passage can be likened to the entrance of the first type ball entry means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make the premise of the game easier to understand, that if the ball enters the entrance of the first guide path, the first reward will be given. Furthermore, since the first guide path shaped to delay the game ball is visible, it is possible to prevent the design from deteriorating or from making the specific area look complicated.

Means C-9. Means C-1 to C-8 according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, characterized in that an entrance display section indicating each entrance of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route is provided so as to be visible from the front. Game machine.

According to means C-9, the locations of the entrances of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route are clarified, and the game property such as whether the game ball enters into the first ball entry route or the second ball entry route is determined. can be made easier to understand. Note that the entrance display section may be configured to be able to change its appearance based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entry route.

Means C-10. In the specific area,
a first guide path constituting the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path constituting the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding game balls that have entered the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path,
The type sorting means can change the state between a stopping state in which the game balls that have reached the type sorting means are stopped in the type sorting means and a guiding state in which the game balls are guided to the first guiding path or the second guiding path. The vehicle is provided with a stopping means for changing the state between the stopping state and the guiding state at predetermined time intervals or based on a predetermined opportunity,
The type sorting means includes a stopping section in which game balls are stopped in the stopped state,
The stopping section includes a first stopping section where the parked game balls are guided to the first guiding path when the type sorting means is set to the guiding state, and a first parking section where the parked game balls are guided to the first guiding path. and a second stop part guided to the second guidance passage,
The first ball entry route is configured by the first guide path and the first stop, and the second ball entry route is configured by the second guide path and the second stop,
The early detection means include:
a first standby detection means (first early detection means) for detecting game balls parked in the first stop portion;
and second standby detection means for detecting game balls parked in the second parking part,
Any one of means C-1 to C-9, characterized in that the early teaching means is configured to be able to teach information related to information detected by the first standby detection means and the second standby detection means. The gaming machine described in .

According to means C-10, when the type sorting means is in the stopped state, based on the detection information of the standby detection means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guiding state, the game ball is guided to the second guiding path. It is possible to teach that the game ball is currently only guided to the first guiding path (the first grant is performed). becomes. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the performance when the type sorting means is in a stationary state, and to improve the interest.

In addition, ``When a game ball is parked at the second stationary section, the type sorting means is brought into the guidance state regardless of whether a game ball is stationary at the first stationary section. Accordingly, the game balls parked in the second stopping section are guided to the second guide path, and the second award is performed based on the detection by the second type ball entry detection means. good.

D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, has been known as a type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine is configured to play a game using game balls, and includes a game area in which the game balls can move, and the game balls fired by a firing means are guided to the game area.

In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the pachinko machine is based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. When the specific ball entry means is set in an open state that allows the game ball to enter a specific area, and the game ball that enters the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There are also cases where a special game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

By the way, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means during the special gaming state or in a state where the right to the special gaming state has been obtained, further special gaming states will not be granted. Not done. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon occurs, such as multiple game balls entering the special ball entry means in succession, the right to be granted the special gaming state will only be granted once, and the player will not be able to make a loss. There is a concern that people may get the impression that it is a waste, etc. As a result, there is a concern that a situation may arise where the player is not happy about the situation even though the player has come to a favorable situation such as being granted a special gaming state.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a game that can suppress the decline in interest caused by a plurality of game balls entering the special ball entry means. The aim is to provide the opportunity.

Means D-0. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
The specific ball entering means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
A first award is performed when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entering detection means,
In a gaming machine, when a game ball is detected by the second type of ball entering detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
In the specific area,
a first guide path that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide path or the second guide path,
The type allocating means is configured to sort game balls into the first type when simultaneously allocating n game balls, which are more than m, than when allocating m game balls that have reached the type allocating means at the same time. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to increase the ratio of guiding to two guiding passages.

Means D-1. a game area where game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
The specific ball entering means is
In a state where a game ball is present in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second type ball entry means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
A second type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second type ball entry means is provided,
A first award is performed when a game ball is detected by the first type ball entering detection means,
In a gaming machine, when a game ball is detected by the second type of ball entering detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
In the specific area,
a first guide path that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide path that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide path or the second guide path,
The type sorting means can change the state between a stopping state in which the game balls that have reached the type sorting means are stopped in the type sorting means and a guiding state in which the game balls are guided to the first guiding path or the second guiding path. The vehicle is provided with a stopping means for changing the state between the stopping state and the guiding state at predetermined time intervals or based on a predetermined opportunity,
The type sorting means includes a stopping section in which game balls are stopped in the stopped state,
The stopping section includes a first stopping section where the parked game balls are guided to the first guiding path when the type sorting means is set to the guiding state, and a first parking section where the parked game balls are guided to the first guiding path. and a second stop part guided to the second guidance passage,
When a game ball is parked in the second stopping part, the type sorting means is put in the guiding state, regardless of whether a game ball is stopped in the first stopping part. A gaming machine characterized in that the game balls parked in the second stopping section are guided to the second guide path, and the second award is performed based on detection by the second type ball entry detection means. .

According to the means D-1, for example, when game balls are parked in both the first stopping part and the second stopping part, the type sorting means is put into the guiding state, so that the game balls are guided to the second guiding path. The second award is made based on the second type of ball entry detection means detecting the game ball. For this reason, for example, although the game ball that had been parked at the second stopping section was guided to the second guiding path, the gaming ball that was stopping at the first stopping section was also guided to the first guiding path. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unpleasant phenomenon in which the second provision is not performed (the first provision ends up being performed). Therefore, it is possible to ensure an easy-to-understand gameplay in which the game ball is stopped at the second stop and guided to the second guiding path, and the exciting points (highlights, points of emphasis ) can be made clear.

Furthermore, if a large number of game balls enter the specific area of the specific ball entry means, it will be easier to park the game balls in the second stopping part, and there will be no need to fear that the game balls will be stopped in the first stopping part. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to associate allowing a large number of game balls into a specific area with being advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to completely eliminate the situation where people have a negative impression about letting a game ball enter a specific area of the specific ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the gameplay by letting the game ball enter the specific area as much as possible. You can enjoy it to the fullest.

In addition, in the state where the first award is determined and the state where the second award is determined, the first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means The configuration may be such that even if the above detection is performed, the corresponding first addition and the second addition are not performed.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the one-to-one correspondence between the first stopping part and the second stopping part and the first guiding passage and the second guiding passage, The configuration may be such that whether or not the game balls are guided to the second guide path is determined depending on the arrangement or number of the game balls. For example, there may be a configuration in which there are stop parts A, B, and C, and stop parts A and B correspond to the first stop part, and stop part C corresponds to the second stop part. B exists, and if the game ball is stopped at only one of the stop parts A and B, the game ball is guided to the first guide path, and in that case, the game ball is not stopped. Stopping parts A and B correspond to the first stopping part, and if a game ball is parked in both stopping parts A and B, the game ball is guided to the second guide path, in which case, A configuration may be adopted in which the stop portions A and B correspond to the second stop portion.

Means D-2. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the first stop part and the second stop part are formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating game balls in the stopped state of the type sorting means.

According to the means D-2, the game balls parked in the first stopping part and the second stopping part can be more securely held (positioned) in the first stopping part and the second stopping part. Therefore, in a state where the game balls are stopped in the type sorting means, it is possible to more accurately judge whether or not the parked game balls are guided to the second guide path. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the game ball does not stay there and flows into the second guide path, it is easier to recognize that the game ball is guided to the second guide path. Furthermore, the user can enjoy the state in which it is determined that the game ball will be guided to the second guide path, and can more carefully see how the game ball is guided to the second guide path. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a gaming experience in which the player is excited and saddened by the way the game balls are parked in the type sorting means.

Means D-3. a first standby detection means for detecting a game ball parked in the first parking part;
a second standby detection means for detecting a game ball parked in the second parking part;
The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized in that it comprises the first standby detection means and standby teaching means capable of teaching information regarding the information detected by the second standby detection means. .

According to means D-3, when the type sorting means is in the stopped state, based on the detection information of the standby detection means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guiding state, the game ball is guided to the second guiding path. It is possible to teach that the game ball is currently only guided to the first guiding path (the first grant is performed). becomes. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the performance when the type sorting means is in a stationary state, and to improve the interest.

In particular, when positioning of the parked game ball is performed as in the above means D-2, when the game ball is parked at the first stop part or the second stop part, the game ball is moved to the first stop part. It is determined whether the guide path or the second guide path is to be guided, and the accuracy of teaching based on the detection information to the standby detection means is improved. Therefore, the above effects are more reliably achieved.

Means D-4. When a game ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means, a first game state is assigned as the first assignment,
When a game ball is detected by the second type ball entry detection means, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is provided as the second grant,
In the state in which it has been decided to grant the first gaming state, in the state in which it has been determined to grant the second gaming state, in the first gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the first type of ball entry Even when the detection means and the second type of ball entry detection means are detected, the corresponding first application and the second application are not performed,
According to any one of the means D-1 to D-3, the first guide path is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second guide path. Game machine.

According to means D-4, when the type sorting means is set to the guidance state in a state where game balls are parked at the first stop section and the second stop section, the game balls parked at the first stop section The game ball parked in the second stopping section is detected by the second type ball entry detection means before the ball is detected by the first type ball entry detection means. For this reason, the effect of the means D-1, which allows the player to enjoy the game nature of entering as many game balls as possible into a specific area, is more reliably achieved.

In addition, by adopting this configuration, when game balls are parked in both the first stopping part and the second stopping part, the game balls stopped in the first stopping part can enter the first guiding path. Even if the game ball is parked in the first stop part and the second stop part, for example, if the game ball is stopped in both the first stop part and the second stop part, the second grant can be made. There is no need to separately provide a configuration for preventing game balls from entering the first guide path.

Means D-5. The second stopping part is arranged downstream of the first stopping part, and by keeping the game ball in the first stopping part, the game ball can reach the second stopping part. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that it can be stopped.

According to the means D-5, by allowing a plurality of game balls to reach the type sorting means, the player can enjoy watching the game step up to become advantageous for the player. Furthermore, it is possible to perceive the fact that the game ball is stopped at the first stopping part as a good impression.

Means D-6. The type sorting means includes a sorting part that guides the game balls parked by the stopping means to the first guide path or the second guide path when the type sorting means is in the guiding state,
When the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is m, all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guiding path by the sorting section,
When the number of game balls parked by the parking means is n, which is more than the m number, at least one of the parked game balls is guided to the second guiding path by the sorting section. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized by:

According to the means D-6, it is determined whether the game balls guided to the second guiding path will appear depending on the number of game balls parked by the type sorting means in the parked state. In other words, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping n game balls in the type sorting means. Therefore, the effect of the above-mentioned means D-1, such as allowing the player to enjoy the game property of entering as many game balls as possible into a specific area, is more reliably achieved. Furthermore, by allowing a plurality of game balls to reach the type sorting means, the player can enjoy watching the game progress step-by-step to become more advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this means, when the type sorting means is set to the guidance state and at least one of the parked game balls is to be guided to the second guiding path, it is possible to determine whether those game balls are parked or not. When the stopped part corresponds to the second stopped part (as a result), the type sorting means is set to the guiding state, and all the parked game balls are guided to the first guiding path. , the stop portion where those game balls were parked corresponds (as a result) to the first stop portion.

Means D-7. The stopping portion is formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating game balls one by one in the stopping state of the type sorting means,
A standby detection means for detecting a game ball parked in the parking part is provided corresponding to each of the parking parts, and
The game according to means D-6, characterized in that a teaching means capable of teaching information regarding the number of game balls parked in the type distribution means based on the detection information of the standby detection means is provided. Machine.

According to the means D-7, it becomes possible to reliably grasp the number of game balls parked by the standby detection means. Then, it is possible to perform a performance such as that the number of parked game balls has reached n, or that there are still (how many) number of parked game balls left until the number of parked game balls reaches n, improving performance. etc. can be achieved.

Means D-8. comprising an arrival detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific area and always reaches the type sorting means,
The stop means is brought into a driving state when the arrival detection means detects the arrival,
Any one of the means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the type sorting means is brought into a driving stopped state at a reference position where the said type sorting means is brought into the stopped state. The game machine described.

According to means D-8, as in the case where the stopping means continues to operate and the type allocating means changes between the stopped state and the guide state, the game ball that has reached the type allotting means is not stopped and the type allotting means It is possible to avoid the situation where the vehicle passes through the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying how the game balls stay in the type sorting means. Moreover, it is possible to provide a special feeling when the stopping means is driven while saving energy.

It should be noted that there is an effective state in which the detection of the first type ball entry detection means and the second type ball entry detection means is effective, and an invalid state in which the detection is invalid. Switched to the invalid state when the ball detection means detects the ball, and switched to the valid state when the first provision or the second provision is performed and there are no game balls in the specific area. It may also be possible to switch.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by the player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A pinball game machine that includes a game area where game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine having a gaming area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by the player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) in which the game ball is guided and extends substantially vertically, and each ball entry means (general winning hole, A pinball game machine is equipped with a variable prize winning device, an operating port, etc., and is configured such that the behavior of game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine, 33a, 33b... Starting winning device, 33c... Opening/closing member, 37... Central winning unit, 42... Decorative pattern display device, 43... Special display device, 224a, 224b... Starting winning switch, 261... Main control device , 262...Sub control device, 401...Specific area, 403...Ball entrance opening, 404...Blade member, 410...Rotating body unit, 414...Rotating body, 416...Pocket section, 416a...Special pocket section, 427...Safe passage , 428...out passage, 437...incoming ball count switch, 461...special incoming ball detection switch, 462...non-special incoming ball detection switch.

Claims (1)

As a result of the lottery, there may be a state in which the first result is awaited and a state in which the second result is awaited,
The second result is a result more advantageous to the player than the first result,
Both the first result and the second result may be in a waiting state,
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, it is taught in a predetermined manner that the first result is awaited, and the first result and the second result are awaited. a first standby teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are on standby in a state where both the first result and the second result are on standby;
In a state where the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the predetermined aspect does not teach that the first result is awaited, and the first result is In a state where both the second result and the second result are on standby, it is possible to teach that the second result is on standby without teaching in the predetermined manner that the first result is on standby. a second standby teaching means;
An upper limit is set on the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait, and when the upper limit of the number of the first result and the second result to be made to wait is reached, no more The first result and the second result are not waited for,
The second waiting teaching means is configured to be able to display characters to teach that the second result is waiting,
comprising means for resolving the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the canceling means is brought into a stopped state after an operation for canceling the state in which the first result is awaited and the state in which the second result is awaited is completed.

Images